Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutOlin Hall PlansINVITATION TO PROPOSERS OLIN HALL SUITE 270 RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 FEBRUARY 29, 2016 PREPARED BY: CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITIES ENGINEERING 201 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 (607) 254-4877 DISTRIBUTED BY: FACILITIES CONTRACTS 121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 (607) 255-3982 Olin Hall Suite 270 Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTS Instructions to Proposers Bid Form Form of Agreement - Short Form Contract PAGE IFP -1 thru 4 BF -1 thru 11 1 thru 18 Olin Hall (2024) Suites 270-318 Renovations Project — Asbestos Bulk Sampling Bulk Sample Report Technical Specifications DIVISION 04 - Section 04 2731 DIVISION 07 - Section 07 8400 Section 07 9200 DIVISION 09 - Section 09 0561 Section 09 2116 Section 09 5100 Section 09 6813 Section 09 9123 DIVISION 21 - Section 21 0500 Section 21 1313 DIVISON 23 — Section 23 0500 Section 23 0523 Section 23 0529 Section 23 0553 Section 23 0593 Section 23 0700 Section 23 0900 Section 23 0901 Section 23 2113 Section 23 3113 Section 23 3300 Section 23 3713 MASONRY REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION FIRESTOPPING JOINT SEALANTS FINISHES COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS TILE CARPETING INTERIOR PAINTING FIRE SUPPRESSION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC HVAC INSULATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY HYDRONIC PIPING METAL DUCTS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Olin Hall Suite 270 Renovation Section 23 3714 CHILLED BEAMS Olin Hall Suite 270 Renovation Technical Specifications (cont'd) DIVISION 26 - Section 26 0519 Section 26 0526 Section 26 0529 Section 26 0533 Section 26 0553 Section 26 2726 ELECTRICAL LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WIRING DEVICES DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 1500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING Drawings T-001 TITLE SHEET G-001 CODE REVIEW SUMMARY ARCHITECTURE A-000 SCOPE OF WORK, GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLOGY, AND ABBREVIATIONS A-102 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PLAN A-302 REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION MECHANICAL M-000 MD -102 M-102 300 MECHANICAL SYMBOLOGY, ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES & SCOPE OF WORK PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION PLAN BUILDING M - AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM DETAIL Drawings (cont'd) FIRE PROTECTION FP -000 SCOPE OF WORK, GENERAL NOTES, SCHEDULES AND SYMBOLOGY FP -102 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLANS ELECTRICAL E-000 SCOPE OF WORK, GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLOGY, AND ABBREVIATIONS ED - 102 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E-102 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS INFORMATION FOR PROPOSERS 1. PROPOSAL FORMS a. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations. Proposer's legal name must be fully stated. 2. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be addressed to: MAIL OR BRING TO: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Proposal for: Olin Hall Suite 270 Renovation Submitted by: Proposer b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above no later than 2:OOPM on April 6, 2016. c. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner, in Room 102C Humphreys Service Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, 2:OOPM on April 6, 2016. The Owner reserves the right to postpone the time and date of opening of proposals at any time prior to the time and date announced in this Invitation to Proposers or amendment thereto. 3. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, to waive minor informalities in any Proposal, and to make award in the best interest of the Owner. b. Prices shall be guaranteed for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after Proposal opening. 4. PROJECT START AND COMPLETION a. The project should be started within ten (10) calendar days from written authorization to proceed, and shall be completed by June 24, 2016. INFORMATION FOR PROPOSERS IFP -1 5. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website (http://finance.fs.corlell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm ). For assistance call 607-255-5343. b. Additional sets will be available at $20.00 per set without refund. All subcontractors and suppliers requiring may order these at $20.00 per set without refund. No partial sets will be issued. The Contract Documents remain the property of the Owner. c. The successful bidder will be allowed ten (10) sets of drawings and specifications. 6. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the period prior to Proposal due date shall be acknowledged in the Proposal. 7. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Proposer shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize him/herself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the Operations to be carried on under the proposed Agreement, and make such investigation as he/she may see fit so that he/she shall fully understand the facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Agreement. b. Each Proposer shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the outline specifications, with the Proposed Agreement, and with Cornell's Standard General Conditions. c. By submitting a Proposal, the Proposer covenants and affirms that he/she has carefully examined the Drawing, outline specifications, and associated General Conditions, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, and the site; that he/she relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his/her own investigation he has satisfied him/herself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its perfollnance; and that as a result of such examination and investigation, he/she fully understands the conditions of making a Proposal and that he/she will not make any claim for, and waives any right to, damages because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the Invitation Documents and the conditions of making a Proposal. 8. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They are listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. INFORMATION FOR PROPOSERS IFP -2 9. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Proposer find discrepancies in or omissions from the Invitation Documents, or should he/she be in doubt as to their meaning, he/she shall at once notify Randall Herko, r1h352 a,cornell.edu, (607-254-4877), who will send written instructions to all Proposers. 10. PRE-BID MEETING a. A pre-bid meeting is being scheduled for March 21, 2016 at 11:OOAM, in Room B26A Humphreys Service Building, to clarify the intent of the contract documents as necessary. 11. TAX EXEMPTION STATUS a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes and certain Federal Excise Taxes. b. Proposers shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers, from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations, of the tax exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. c. At the Proposer's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 12. BONDS a. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 11 a. above. INFORMATION FOR PROPOSERS IFP -3 13. QUALITY CONTROL a. The implementation of effective quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. While the Owner's Representative is authorized to review, stop, and reject the work, no actions or communications on the part of the Owner's Representative shall be construed to represent an approval of any part of the work nor to release the Contractor from any obligations under the provisions of the Agreement. b. A list of names from which the Proposer proposes to select subcontractors, material supplies, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. 14. CONSTRUCTION TRADES a. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins -Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by members of the appropriate local union including Electricians, Plumbers & Pipefitters, Carpenters, Bricklayers, Masons & Plasterers, Painters, and Sheet Metal Workers. INFORMATION FOR PROPOSERS IFP -4 Olin Hall Suite 270 Renovation Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID FORM Submitted by: Date To: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Gentlemen: The undersigned, a (Name of Bidder) (Type of Firm, State of Incorporation, if applicable) of (Address) having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), and the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated February 29, 2016 prepared by Cornell University Facilities Engineering, 201 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, New York 14853 as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following considerations: 1. BASE BID a. All work complete, for the sum of for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS. ($ ) BID FORM BF -I 2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will result neither in an addition to nor a deduction from the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates. c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the following Alternate Proposals within fifteen (15) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. Alternate No. Description ADD DEDUCT NONE. BID FORM BF -2 3. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within ten (10) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to complete the project no later than June 24, 2016. 4. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions: (1) Prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors", and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3) names. c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each such Section or Subdivision. MASONRY THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION FLOORING PAINTING BID FORM BF -3 FIRE SUPPRESSION HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) ELECTRICAL BID FORM BF -4 5. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FORCES a. If awarded a Contract, we will perform the following portions of the Work with forces directly employed by the undersigned: b. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor's main Project Manager will be: (include resume with bid) The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable objection. c. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor's main Superintendent will be: (include resume with bid) The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Time Progress Schedule" showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. 7. BONDS a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $ (10% of Bid Amount) is attached to this Bid. BID FORM BF -5 8. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum. b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work included under Alternate Proposals are excluded. Values relative to General Contractor's costs for General Conditions are excluded. Spec Section Trades and/or Subdivision Division 04 Masonry Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 09 Finishes Division 21 Fire Suppression Division 23 HVAC Division 26 Electrical Division 27 Communications Total Values Included in Base Bid Labor Material Total Combined Bid $ BID FORM BF -6 9. SUBSTITUTIONS a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing in the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. Item and Specification Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material BID FORM BF -7 10. ACCEPTANCE a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid due date. b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. c. The undersigned further agrees, if requested by the Owner, to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds pursuant to Article 7 herein within ten (10) calendar days of issuance of such notice. d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within fifteen (15) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. e. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above noted period of time. BID FORM BF -8 11. ADDENDUM RECEIPT a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications is acknowledged: Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: By: Title: Business Address: (Bidder) BID FORM BF -9 CERTIFICATE OF NON -COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. Dated: By: Title: (Bidder) BID FORM BF -10 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, certify that I am the of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that , who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Foirir and attachments thereto were duly signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. Dated: (Secretary -Clerk) (CORPORATE SEAL) BID FORM BF -11 Contract No. -- XXX SHORT FORM CONTRACT This Contract made as of the *** day of *** 2016, by and between CORNELL UNIVERSITY, Ithaca, New York 14853, hereinafter called "Owner", and ***, hereinafter called "Contractor". WITNESSETH: The Owner and the Contractor mutually agree as follows: 1. SCOPE OF CONTRACT The Contractor agrees to furnish and provide all the supplies, materials and labor, and to perform to the satisfaction of the Owner all work of every kind required, necessary to, proper for or incidental to the OLIN HALL SUITE 270 RENOVATION per *** at Cornell University, hereinafter called the "Project", in strict accordance with this Contract, the Proposal, and the Drawings and Specifications, hereinafter collectively called the "Contract" or "Contract Documents", all of which have been examined by the Contractor and are deemed to be a part of this Contract. 2. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor shall complete all the work covered by the Contract to the satisfaction of Cornell University and in accordance with the Contract Documents by *** unless such period is otherwise extended by the Owner, or be responsible to the Owner for any damage caused by the failure or omission by the Contractor to comply with this paragraph. 3. PAYMENT 3.1 The Owner shall pay to the Contractor and the latter shall accept as full and complete payment for the performance of this Contract for the sum of *** ($0.00) 1 Rev. 06-2014 which sum is the amount of the contract consideration. If the progress and performance of the work is satisfactory to the Owner, the latter, upon application submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect, if any, and the Owner, will make periodic progress payments of the contract consideration to the Contractor, the amount of such progress payments to be based upon the value of the work performed by the Contractor since the last previous progress payment, less an amount equal to 10% thereof, which sum the Owner shall reserve from each progress payment until all the work covered by the Contract has been completed. 3.1.1 Time of Payment. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in this Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt and approval of submitted invoice. 3.1.2 All invoices shall include the Contract Number, the full name of the project, the name of the Owner's Representative and a summary of previous payments. 3.1.3 All invoices shall be submitted to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 3.2 Upon the completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, the Owner shall make a final payment equal to the amount of the Contract consideration less all previous payments by the Owner to the Contractor. 3.2.1 Application's for Final Payment shall include a Final Release, Consent of Surety to Make Final Payment and warranty information as required under the Contract. 3.3 The acceptance by the Contractor, or by anyone claiming by or through the Contractor, the final payment shall constitute and operate as a release to the Owner from any and all claims of any liability for anything done or furnished for or relating to or arising out of the work covered by the Contract and for any prior act, neglect or default on the part of the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees in connection therewith. Should the Contractor refuse to accept the final payment as tendered by the Owner or should they refuse to execute the final application for payment without protest and without reserving any rights or claims against the payment without protest and without reserving any rights or claims against the Owner, it shall constitute a waiver of any right to interest on the payment so tendered and/or on the amount set forth in said final application for payment. 3.4 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with their Federal Tax Identification Number. 2 Rev. 06-2014 4. CHANGES IN THE WORK 4.1. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: A. By agreement with the Contractor. B. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. This method shall be used if the Contract contains applicable unit prices. (i) To the extent that a Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. ( ( i) Materials Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. D. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Paragraph C, except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format contained on the Owner's website. 4.2 Mark-ups: Work performed by the Contractor. Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 5. RISKS ASSUMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 5.1 The Contractor solely assumes all risks, except those risks caused by defects in the drawings or specifications prepared or furnished by the Owner or the Architect, for loss or damage, occurring prior to the Owner's acceptance of all work, to all or any part of the work covered by the Contract and for all claims, losses and damages for bodily injury, including death, and property damage arising out of or as a result of or in connection with the performance by the Contractor of the work covered by the Contract. 3 Rev. 06-2014 5.2 The Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all claims, losses and damages described above. 5.3 The Contractor's obligations under this section shall not be deemed waived, limited or discharged by the enumeration in the Contract Documents of the kinds and amounts of insurance that the Contractor is required to and/or does procure. 5.4 Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of payment therefore shall release the Contractor from their obligations under this section. 5.5 Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create or give third parties any claims or rights of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. 6. PUBLIC SAFETY AND RISK INVOLVING PROPERTY 6.1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work, and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes as well as regulations of the Owner's Life Safety Services to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workmen and the public and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created by the construction. 6.2 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of their organization on the work whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. The name and position of any person so designated shall be submitted to the Owner in writing. 6.3 In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Owner, is hereby permitted to act at their discretion to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and shall so act without appeal if so authorized or instructed. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by the Owner. 6.4 The Contractor shall so conduct its operations as not to close or obstruct any portion of any highway, road or other property until permits therefor have been obtained from the proper authorities. If any of the above are required to be kept open or shall be damaged or rendered unsafe by Contractor's operations, Contractor shall, at their own expense, make such repairs and provide such temporary detours, guards, bridges, lights and other signals as necessary for public safety and as will be acceptable to the proper authorities. 6.5 Except as otherwise specifically provided, Contractor shall not do any work that would affect any pipeline, telephone, or electric transmission line, drainage ditch or channels, or any other structure, nor meter upon the right-of-way or any other lands appurtenant thereto, until notified by the Project Manager that the Owner has secured permission therefor from the proper authority. Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time or any extra compensation on account of any postponement, interference or delay caused by any such structure being on or adjacent to the site of the work. 4 Rev. 06-2014 6.6 The Contractor shall preserve and protect all cultivated and planted areas, and all natural vegetation such as trees, shrubs, and grass on or adjacent to the premises which as determined by the Owner, do not unreasonably interfere with the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any such property and unauthorized cutting or destroying of trees and vegetation, including damage due to careless operation of equipment, stockpiling of materials or tracking by equipment or vehicles. 6.7 The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all its work from damage and shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. The Contractor shall make good any such damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property. The Contractor and employees of the Contractor shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. 7. GUARANTEES 7.1 The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at its own cost and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by the Contract within the (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract or at such other date or dates as the Owner may specify prior to that time, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such other work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. 7.2 Unless such removal, replacement and/or repair shall be performed by the Contractor within ten (10) working days after receipt of written notice from the Owner specifying such defect, or if such defect is of such a nature that it cannot be completely removed, repaired and/or replaced within said ten (10) day period and the Contractor shall not have diligently commenced removing, repairing and/or replacing such defect within said ten (10) day period and shall not thereafter with reasonable diligence and in good faith proceed to do such work, the Owner may employ such other person, firm or corporation as it may choose to perform such removal, replacement and/or repair and the Contractor agrees, upon demand, to pay to the Owner all amounts which it expends for such work. 5 Rev. 06-2014 8. DEFAULT OF THE CONTRACTOR In the event that the Contractor shall fail to proceed with the work when and as directed by the Owner or the Architect or if the Contractor in the opinion of the Owner, shall fail to cany on the work with proper speed or if the Contractor shall otherwise fail to comply with the provisions of this Contract, the Owner, upon fourteeii (14) days written notice to the Contractor, may declare the Contractor in default of this Contract and arrange for the work to be finished in such manner and method as may be deemed advisable by the Owner. If the Owner declares the Contractor in default, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the cost of all additional architectural and engineering services necessary, in the Owner's opinion, as a result of such default. The Owner shall deduct from the contract consideration the cost of such additional services and, if the Owner has the work completed by other than the Contractor's surety, the actual cost of completion of all work covered by the Contract. If the unpaid balance of the contract consideration, including retainage from progress payments, is insufficient to pay such costs, then the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay the Owner the amount of such excess costs. 9. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW Each and every provision required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein and in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted then, upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. 10. INSURANCE Cornell University requires that contractors submit evidence of adequate insurance prior to the commencement of performance of work for the University. Minimum requirements are: A. Statutory Worker's Compensation Insurance under the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto. Coverage "B" Employers Liability must have limits of at least $100,000. B. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, subject to limits of $1,000,000 each occurrence, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater. Coverage must be provided for Bodily Injury Liability, Broad Form Property Damage Liability, Contractual Liability and Products and Completed Operations coverage. Completed Operations coverage is to be maintained for a minimum period of two years after completion of the Cornell contract. C. Automobile Liability Insurance subject to limits of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence for Bodily Injury and $100,000 each occurrence for property damage. Such Automobile Liability Insurance shall be for all of contractor's owned, non -owned, and hired automobiles. D. All Risk Property Insurance providing replacement cost coverage for any property damage to contractor's property which is caused by a loss of any kind and description to any property brought onto Cornell University premises. The contractor agrees to waive on behalf of itself and its insurance company subrogation against the University for any loss or damage which is covered or should be covered by this insurance. 6 Rev. 06-2014 E. All liability policies should be issued on an "occurrence" basis. A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE for all policies required must be issued to Cornell University and received by the Office of Facilities Contracts, 121 Humphreys Service Building, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York 14853, prior to any work. F. Cornell University will be added to the contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance Policy by endorsement as an Additional Insured and evidence of such will be provided in the contractors' certificate of insurance. All policies must also be endorsed as "primary" for purposes of this contract. G. All certificates of insurance will provide for a minimum of 30 days notice to Cornell University prior to cancellation, non -renewal or change in policy terms and/or conditions. 11. INDEMNIFICATION The contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Cornell University and its trustees, officers, agents, and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character, name, or description including reasonable attorney fees, brought on account of: A. any injuries or damages (real or alleged) received or sustained by any person, persons, or property, on account of any act, any omission, any neglect, or any misconduct of the contractor. B. any neglect of the contractor in safeguarding the work. C. the use of unacceptable materials by the contractor in performing the work. D. any injuries or damages sustained by the contractors' employees. Cornell reserves the right to retain whatever funds which would be due Contractor under this contract until such suits, action or actions, claim or claims for injuries or damages as aforesaid shall have been settled and satisfactory evidence to that effect furnished. 12. GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.1 The word or designation "site" as used in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be the area within the Contract Limit Lines, as shown on the drawings, and all other areas upon which the Contractor is to perform work. 12.2 The word or designation "work" as used in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be the using, performing, installing, furnishing and supplying of all materials, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary or convenient to the successful completion of the Project and the carrying out of all duties and obligations imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract. 12.3 The captions of articles or sections of the Contract Documents are intended for convenience and for reference purposes only and in no way define, limit or describe the scope or intent thereof, or of this Contract nor in any way affect this Contract. 7 Rev. 06-2014 12.4 The Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto and no statement, promise, condition, understanding, inducement or representation, oral or written, expressed or implied, which is not contained herein shall be binding or valid and the Contract Documents shall not be changed, modified or altered in any manner except by an instrument in writing executed by the parties hereto. 12.5 The Contractor agrees that it will not assign this contract without the prior written consent of the Owner. 12.6 If this contract is funded by New York State or federal funds, it shall be deemed executory to the extent of state or federal monies being available to Cornell and no liability on account thereof shall be incurred by Cornell beyond monies available for the purpose thereof. 12.7 The Contractor, subcontractor, or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment in the performance of this contract or any subcontract thereunder because of Equal Employment Opportunity protected class status including age, race, disability, ethnicity, national origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, marital status, Vietnam Era or special disabled veteran status as applicable under federal, state and local laws. 13. STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to Cornell University on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. 14. ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the costs incun-ed for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at Contractor's local office or at Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed. Each Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by Owner, books and records respecting the Work. 8 Rev. 06-2014 15. LIENS Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a complete release or discharge of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof and, in either case, an affidavit that so far as the Contractor has knowledge or information the releases and receipts include all the labor and materials for which a lien could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a receipt or release in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner, to indemnify him against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the later may be compelled to pay in discharging such a lien, including all costs and a reasonable attorney's fee. No partial or progress payments shall be made to the Contractor as long as a lien is outstanding on the real property of the Owner by reason of claims arising out of the work of this Contract. 16. TERMINATION The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually and reasonably incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total authorized releases to the date of termination. 17. GOVERNING LAW 17.1 Unless otherwise specified, this Agreement shall be governed by the law of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. 17.2 The effective date of this Agreement shall be the date of the Owner's signature. CONTRACTOR'S NAME CORNELL UNIVERSITY Contractor Owner By: By: Name: Name: Please print Title: Title: Date: Date: 9 Please print Rev. 06-2014 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR OLIN HALL SUITE 270 RENOVATION 1. Qualifications of Bidders All prospective bidders are hereby notified that, on request of the Owner, they must be able to prove to the satisfaction of the Owner, that they have the skill and experience, as well as the necessary facilities, ample financial resources, organization and general reliability to do the work to be perforned under the provisions of the Contract, in a satisfactory manner and within the time specified. 2. Storage of Material and Equipment All material shall be stored in a neat, orderly manner. 3. Temporary Power The Contractor shall make arrangements for necessary temporary electrical power. 4. Construction Water The Contractor shall make arrangements for necessary construction water. 5. Submittals After execution of Contract, and ordering of material, submit for approval the list of all materials, shop drawings and equipment proposed for use to avoid delay in construction schedule. Intention of using specified materials does not relieve obligation of submitting this list. 6. Compliance to Document Follow drawings in the laying out of work and inspect locations of existing utilities and site conditions to be dealt with in the execution of this work. 7. Permits Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 10 Rev. 06-2014 8. Environmental Hazardous or Toxic Materials A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor's performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. Disposal of Waste Material and Title A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" (attached hereto) to the Owner's Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. B. The "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions, is attached to this Section. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. 11 Rev. 06-2014 9. Changes Within the Scope of the Work The Contractor shall, with the written approval of the Owner's representative, and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in layout needed to prevent conflict with existing conditions for proper execution of this work. 10. Clean Up Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the work, keep the site and adjacent roads and sidewalks free from accumulation of waste matter, dirt and rubbish. At the completion of the work, all excess materials, earth, etc., shall be removed from the site. 11. Supervision Contractor shall supply services of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be constantly in charge of work at the site. 12. Representative of Cornell The University will assign a representative of the Owner. Only directives from Cornell University's designated representative (Brenda Smith) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 13. Construction Trades All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins -Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. 14. Work Restrictions A. Parking It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager Brenda Smith for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a "New Construction Employee Form" for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. B. Stand Down Dates April 18 and 19, 2016 May 27, 2016 Lecture Event — all work including end -of -day cleaning must end by 3 pm. No use of the space or building after 3 pm. Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon 12 Rev. 06-2014 May 28, - May 29, 2016 June 10-11,2016 C. Restricted Work Dates May 15 - 24, 2016 15. Noise and Vibration Commencement weekend, no work. Reunion guest arrivals- no work outside fence; no demo or utility work inside fence. Study/Exam period 9 am to 10 pm — No block wall demolition or core drilling. Construction noise must be minimized so that there are no disruptions outside the work area. Use of the corridor and elevator during these dates must be coordinated to minimize noise. Limit and control the nature and extend of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. This includes ensuring CMU are not allowed to fall freely to the floor during normal business hours (8am to 5pm). 13 Rev. 06-2014 Contact Name/Number/Et 1. Contractor Name: Contract No.: Project Name/Description: CU Project Manager: Project End Date: Project Start Date: 0 N U Destination or Disposal Location Transporter asn-a I Waste Management +,-,yu .zo1auJ1uo3 U spuno.ro SHS aquiPAV SQSIAI Source lolaualuo3 liauzo3 paluw sg 0 0 0 0 bU U Solvents PCBs Asbestos Lead 2 N Chromium Other Toxic Metals (describe in section 4) .-- -r O .-Y'"'-� bA Thermostats Batteries Used Oil Contaminated PPE & Materials Other (describe in section 4) No hazardous waste 0 0 •O 0 bA 0 0 a) bA 0 ct s., N CGN 0 0 U U 0 r 4 c 0 i O C, r. c •C1 O CC ';.7 w Facility Address Disposal Facility Name L OA et U Q Clean soil Non C&D solid waste Other (describe in section IV) No non -hazardous waste will be generated 4. Further description of waste materials expected to be generated during the project: 5. Contractor Certification 0 O vD 0 � c ..0 0 .-- , 0 0 CO a CL) 0 0 'P F cC bA 0 C U0r„ +-' U ct -o -0 , � �; 00U 0., o > •0 1) c O • 0,Cti 4~ 0 o c c bin 0 CG 0 > .4 4° , `. •`n 4--- ca 0 U cs coo •0 - ct c,0 ct> ,., U O•O cva P -i U _ j o o ct 4-i • 0 co!) 00 b.00 3 -v.o ca -0U O ( D ct c c, U 4 o 0• C C o 0 O rn 0 c, L 0 o a) c) c 4, 0 O 9) 3 ccs Project named in Section 1 and that I wi 0 0 U 0 coc 0 U 0 0 W U 0 w 0 g, 0 E U O U 0 •`,1; z o 0 0 to C +-� N U co 4) O c( 5 w � o r-� .2)) U Contractor Signature a, 3 g c U P,x 0 a U W o U x O CD O U 0 0 O 0 • .coM 0a us Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan: The following is not solid waste: Discarded materials that are being beneficially used pursuant to 6NYCRR Section 360-1.15 A material is disposed of if it is discharged, deposited, injected, dumped, spilled, leaked or placed into or on any land or water so that such material or any constituent thereof may enter the environment or be emitted into the air or discharged into groundwater or surface water. Asbestos: Any waste material containing the asbestiform varieties of: Chrysotile (serpentine); crocidolite (riebeckite); amosite (cum- mingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite. Batteries: All spent batteries being disposed that are regulated by New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYDEC) in 6 New York Code of Rules and Regulations (NYCRR) Part 374- 3, or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 273.2 as Universal Waste Batteries. Borrow Material: Fill material required for on-site construction that is obtained from other locations. Chromium: Any waste containing chromium or contaminated with chromium that exceeds the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for chromium as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Clean Soil: Soil that is uncontaminated with any solid or hazardous waste, C&D Debris, trees, stumps, yard waste or wood chips per definitions of those terms below. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris: Uncontaminated solid waste resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads; and uncontaminated solid waste resulting from land clearing. Such waste includes, but is not limited to bricks, concrete and other masonry materials, soil, rock, wood (including painted, treated and coated wood and wood products), land clearing debris, wall coverings, plaster, drywall, plumbing fixtures, non -asbestos insulation, roofing shingles and other roof coverings, asphaltic pavement, glass, plastics that are not sealed in a manner that conceals other wastes, empty buckets ten gallons or less in size and having no more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom, electrical wiring and components containing no hazardous liquids, and pipe and metals that are incidental to any of the above. Solid waste that is not C&D debris (even if resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads and land clearing) includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, garbage, corrugated container board, electrical fixtures containing hazardous liquids such as fluorescent light ballasts or transformers, fluorescent lights, carpeting, furniture, appliances, tires, drums, containers greater than ten gallons in size, any containers having more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom and fuel tanks. Specifically excluded from the definition of construction and demolition debris is solid waste (including what otherwise would be construction and demolition debris) resulting from any processing technique, other than that employed at a department - approved C&D debris processing facility, that renders individual waste components unrecognizable, such as pulverizing or shredding. Also, waste contained in an illegal disposal site may be considered C&D debris if the department determines that such waste is similar in nature and content to C&D debris. Construction and Demolition Debris Processing Facility means a processing facility that receives and processes construction and demolition debris by any means. Contaminated PPE & Materials: Any personal protective equipment such as gloves, coveralls, boot covers, respirator cartridges etc.; or rags, tools, articles or other material that has become adulterated by a hazardous material, and which meets the definition of hazardous waste or is considered unsuitable for disposal as regular trash. Exempt C&D and Stump Facilities: The following facilities are exempt from Solid waste management facility permitting requirements provided the facilities operate only between the hours of sunrise and sunset, and (if the allowable waste comes from an off-site source) no fee or other form of consideration is required for the privilege of using the facility for disposal purposes: (i) A site at which only the following C&D debris is placed: recognizable uncontaminated concrete and concrete products (including steel or fiberglass reinforcing rods that are embedded in the concrete), asphalt pavement, brick, glass, soil and rock. (Recognizable means solid waste that can be readily identified as C&D debris by visual observation.) (ii) A landfill for the disposal of trees, stumps, yard waste and wood chips generated from these materials is exempt when origin and disposal of such waste occur on properties under the same ownership or control. Hazardous Waste: Any waste material that meets the definition of "hazardous waste" in 6 NYCRR 371.1 and 40 CFR 261.3 and that is not excluded by regulation. Land Clearing Debris means vegetative matter, soil and rock resulting from activities such as land clearing and grubbing, utility line maintenance or seasonal or storm -related cleanup such as trees, stumps, brush and leaves and including wood chips generated from these materials. Land clearing debris does not include yard waste which has been collected at the curbside. Lead: Any metallic lead or waste material containing lead, e.g. waste paint chips, that exceed the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Light Bulbs: All spent lamps or light bulbs being disposed that are regulated in 6 NYCRR Part 374-3 or 40 CFR 273.5. Mercury: Liquid mercury or any waste containing mercury at levels exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for mercury as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Mold: Construction material or debris contaminated with mold fungus that is unsuitable for reuse. Other Toxic Metals: Any waste containing a metal or contaminated by a metal identified in, and exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit of 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24.PCBs: All electrical articles and equipment or the used oil removed from them, containing polychlorinated biphenyls at levels regulated by 6 NYCRR 371.4(e) Scrap Metal: Bits and pieces of metal parts (e.g., bars, turnings, rods, sheets, wire) or metal pieces that may be combined together with bolts or soldering (e.g., radiators, scrap automobiles, railroad box cars), which when worn or superfluous can be recycled. Solid Waste (Non C&D): Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from industrial, commercial, mining and agricultural operations, and from community activities, but does not include solid or dissolved materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial discharges that are point sources subject to permit under 33 USC 1342, or source, special nuclear or by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, except as may be provided by existing agreements between the State of New York and the government of the United States. Solvents: Substances (usually liquid) suitable for, or employed in, solution, or in dissolving something; as, water is the appropriate solvent for most salts, alcohol for resins, ether for fats, and mercury or acids for metals, etc. Typically these are chemicals are used as paint thinners or cleaning solutions. Spoil: Refuse material removed from an excavation. Used Oil: Any oil refined from crude oil, or any synthetic oil, that has been used, and as a result of such use is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities. "See 6 NYCRR 374-2 or 40 CFR 279" Thermostats: Any mercury -containing thermostat as defined in 6 NYCRR 374-3.1(d), or 40 CFR 273.4 Uncontaminated C&D Debris: C&D Debris that is not mixed or commingled with other solid waste at the point of generation, processing or disposal, and that is not contaminated with spills of a petroleum product, hazardous waste or industrial waste. Contamination from spills of a petroleum product does not include asphalt or concrete pavement that has come into contact with petroleum products through normal vehicle use of the roadway. FINAL RELEASE FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully -paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indenmify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material person or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. Sworn to before me this Day of 20 Corporation or Business Name By: Title: /.DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 I°ioaper Read Entawell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 f=ax: 607.231.6650 . deltaengineers. tern December 8, 2015 Mr. Dale Housek.necht, Asbestos Cornell University Maintenance M.anagem.ent ] 16 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 )1'dinator Re: Olin Hall (2024) Suites 270 and 318 Bellovations Project - Asbestos Bulk Sampling Bulk Sample Report Cornell Work Order No. 8572066 Delta Project No,: 2015.030.292 Dear Mr. Houseknecl Enclosed, please find the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report. Form, the associated Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets, and the Sample Location Drawing for the bulk sampling perforined by Delta Certified :Inspector Thomas Ferro. The sainpling was performed on December 4`I1, 2015 and a.ddressed suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming renovations in. Suites 270 and 318. This included Rooms 270, 270A, 272, 260A, 318, 318A and 318B. Based on a review of the scope work with Cornell's Building Manager Paul Pcllitier, a total of ten (10) bulk samples were collected representing five (5) suspect homogenous materials. Eight (8) of the samples collected were "Non- Friable Organically Bound" (N013) representing four (4) homogenous materials. The retraining two (2) samples were "friable" non-NOB's representing one (1) homogenous material. Results for all ten (10) samples were reported as "No Asbestos Detected". All accessible: thermal system insulation was observed to be non -suspect fiberglass (with non -asbestos end sealant HA 01). All accessible wiring was observed to be non -suspect vinyl -coated. It should be noted that asbestos containing floor tile (VAT) was present under the carpet tiles throughout the Suite 318 Rooms and under the carpeting in the majority of Room 270. Wherever floor tile was present, it did appear to run beneath the area wall base -plates. Bulk sample analysis was performed by Ameri.Sci New York, Inc., an independent laboratory approved / accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene .Association (AIL A). artd the National. Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Analysis of all. Non -NOB materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOFI ELAP 198,1 Methodology. Analysis of all Non -.Friable Organically Bound (NOl3) materials was initially performed by Polarized. Light Microscopy (PLM) fallowing the NYS DOH ELAP 198.6 Methodologies. lithe PLM results were reported as "non -asbestos", the sample was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) tallowing the NYS DOH FLAP 198.4 Methodology. "Positive Stop" sample analysis protocol was utilized for a given homogenous :material set with multiple samples and based on this: all ten (10) samples collected were analyzed. Please reference the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form for sample particulars and details, tt;:ti' +'� tq,'(dI"FCYa,'S'+ c.1-l:t:'Y NGINEER c "S, & IAN')suRvEYoRs, RC, Page 2 o x leve Yvc ieflc c. gees' , or require airy c)ntiret me 1 1 c ifblly, D A ENGINES S, RCHITECTS, LAND SUR EYORS, Stephen Pri lu sky irec or#': Environment Servic II.° Project Pcipervoric `. ENGINE 'RS ARCITITEC1 T.RV;Y3 ,P.t;. Page 3 of Asbeo Bulk Sampt e Repot Form .01 Z 7. 0 & : 1:4 ;;;-°. r � d 0 Lid 3 o < 'zYORS Page 4 0 Laboratory Analytical Result s AMERI SC/ Delta Engineers Attn: Stephen Prislupsky 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 30TH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received 12/07/15 AmeriSci Job # 215121712 Date Examined 12/07/15 P.O. # ELAP # 11480 Page 1 of 3 RE: 2015.030.292; Cornell University; Olin Hall, Rooms 270 And 318, Renovation Bulks Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2015.030.292-01A 215121712-01 No NAD 01 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 270 - End Cap Sealant On Nonsuspect Insulation (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 53.8 % 2015.030.292-01B 215121712-02 No NAD 01 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 272 - End Cap Sealant On Nonsuspect Insulation (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 53 % 2015.030.29.2-02A 215121712-03 No 02 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 270A - Yellow Carpet Square Mastic Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 16.8 NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 2015.030.292-02B 215121712-04 No NAD 02 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 270 - Yellow Carpet Square Mastic (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 21.4 % 2015.030.292-03A 215121712-05 03 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 270A - Black Leveler, Floor Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 14.1 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 215121712 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2015.030.292; Cornell University; Olin Hall, Rooms 270 And 318, Renovation Bulks Page 2 of 3 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2015.030.292-03B 215121712-06 No NAD 03 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 2702 - Black Leveler, Floor (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 13.3 % 2015.030.292-04A 215121712-07 No NAD 04 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 270A - White Leveler, Floor (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2015.030.292-04B 215121712-08 No NAD 04 Location: 2nd Floor, Room 270A - White Leveler, Floor (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2015.030.292-05A 215121712-09 No NAD 05 Location: 3rd Floor, Room 318 - Yellow Carpet Square Mastic (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 34.9 % 2015.030.292-05B 215121712-10 No NAD 05 Location: 3rd Floor, Room 318A - Yellow Carpet Square Mastic (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 12/07/15 Analyst Description: Yellow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 31.3 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 215121712 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2015.030.292; Comell University; Olin Hall, Rooms 270 And 318, Renovation Bulks Page 3 of 3 Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: David W. Roderick "NAD/NSD =no asbestos detect , NA =not analyzed; NAPS=not analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600/M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non -friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that car be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos -containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the Iab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert AAL -094, CT Cert PH -0186, Mass Cert 000054. Reviewed By: END OF REPORT AmeriSci Job #: 215121712 r- .0 o e ° v Lo r' 2" D D D ❑ D D D p @ v) O c~ < < < < < < Z Z Z Z W~ W M 0) ^ y � ,83 Q. a N )+ O. Q a) m Ks d = > Ti c W p � c N C N CO N CO It . P d Q a T Z Z v 0 N. 0 } N t c .c) a T O O Q ❑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 T. ZZWZZ < Z so < Z O> U ECD° mwj❑4c Z ro t ' a) tF o o ai 5 4°c� @ Y E CO `o0oo S mN-0O-N E Client Name: Delta Engineers c O ay 0< a m > y m N Z ro C a) .0 p O m a 42 w m o ;= o.� uvi tc 2 m >, 2, c v CO e6 0 aM OCI O QO tl ro M M CP � ' I pWc`)v) -1 2)t) to NelIM • M np N m CD Q acO c{/} z n ;°Z Q cw 7>1 O oN< 11) N c-i y 6 2 vsC N y � c Q v.— E m c _H E N OcV=� N tp I WI Cc' VLU v O N N_ Q M 1 f ,-- O.ONO 013 0) i' = C (0 .12 I c LL Ti Y O F.. th C U Z a g o O U)p c: ,w >`>. 2.c B . m e C` p 00 v (t/ F.CO > CO NN d E O R 0C C t"' CO CO O Cp N CO V, N T v C 4.. N m N N M 00 e- h N 1 i d to e- N to _ m E ro 0 _ co fl m V' a �' Cp h h to d t0 tO .p 4 g 3 co N ttD ccO ro N atJ)g UJ LT N ro O p N ro> c R% N oom a E c ccp Q$ai . y ilij vOO•p0 ca Ti s0oII e- -4--- tN bmra2 0) o 2 _i ap ,nEE o mo v c N Z Z v 2 N p M 0 Y„ ` O O cr c oo o oo oo a nao=-vpo)O L. L c cr `unA u. LL cr t() vs 0 0 aN O cm9 am C) C o y oro,E. , co v o a) o m 15 irs o c> ro is v (N . ro > CS N>,� c >CJ aJ a j J V_ m n pJ UU U o ; vam3pO ui 0) o•o d O aldcr} j—i y Vu, ltl Q Q m CO IT. Q> O 3a- qm 1- m ' , o < < N < o < , o O N NhNO rcv rn - N NE N N N. h NO m N o i m p Q _3 CC NNNNN M N v >. ,-- Ch E E E E o E E E E a3' Cp 8p p p0O O O d O.o po pp e- 2 O O m oLCtri C o tri C 6 C ui C uj o WC' C ro E c o o a U o 0 0 0 0 pp '� p pp p O N p N pp N p N O N O N O N 8 N p N O a1 LL LL LL LL LL LL LL tL tL N co d = a: E N E 7 co w > a a a v v v c O N N [V CV Nc N N N M M j a C Q as Q W p = 0. c 33q 0O S v `c° o ccZ m E O- O J O 'J O ”) O 3 O 3 J d- 0 O N NW 8' �' 0 c c > ro O E •- E 3 N c0 m' y ns c Q" 0v 2S °c 2 m a) m 0 a o0 ZZ w C) L.CL ca 00 Description / Sample Location ix is x 4 i. A : - ..-.. iN 41,i v ...*)' --) Y444.4914) CARPET— S-Pt4)4406- *JJ4s7-icf , ',031i� vv4 e t.'-'' ,a/00.2j Z. , itV Z1, l A i C.1$ = is O .tea i � c �0 1-, 1. Material Type, Sample Number riS0,,, 8 404 1 ( ) I 1 1 co ID O) J CO Vl z n . cu 1 0 N Q • sQ U) w (a Ott O z 0 O (II N P 198.4 TEM z 0 .C2 N CO Q) w • • E as ca t.6 as > 13 co Ea) N o n ter- c a i (5 m N • r (6 O N 2 O Z 860 Hooper Road, End 00 0 (1) to 0 E (t) 2 45 45 0 • : 0 2 • : 0 0 45 a. 45 45 0 FDescription / Sample Location 1 k $ ic sk—• (4 v c4 vo 41 1 '1 K. 40 k 3 'Iv 'r. ---) r 0 0 T. 1 'c't Q le cra <4 te el ..._. c - 0 7.: = S 1:3 to C Z 0 k v N-*-----.). Material Type Sample Number dt/67 Daft,. 0796V- OA 1, 00 0-9/ DELTA ENGINE A HI C SURVEYORS Page 5 of Sample location Draix ng A ENf INEERS, AR.CH1TE CTS, SU.R E'ORS, l:'. ".. Page 7 of 9 11A 01 — End Cap Sealant cram non -suspect r r° TS 1 HA 02 —Suite 70 Ye. -t Tiles at,f, a" 1k/'t" 'ERS .THITECTS, LAND SUR )RS, P.C. HA 03 — Black -vele from Suite 270 H A 04 — X/1;' Or,: (1 St�(i111 flo 70 Page 8 of 9 DELTA L I'C It`?ARO— 1T ECT;S ORS, P.C. Page 9 of 9 ae?-c rr. Jdd1- z'd7r;`1iu 7?R�,(dP�do`rn. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 042731 Ithaca, New York REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Concrete Brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. E. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 078400 - FIRESTOPPING: Firestopping at penetrations of masonry work. B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. D. ASTM Al 064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. E. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2011. F. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2014. G. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012. H. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2015. I. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2014. J. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011. K. ASTM C 150/C 150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015. L. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). M. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a. N. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. O. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. P. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2012. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 042731 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar and grout. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, reinforcement supporting and spacing devices, and accessories. C. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, unit assembly strength in each plane, and supporting test data. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of 6 inches. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, headers, control joint edges, and other detailed conditions. 3. Load -Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture. B. Concrete Brick: 1. For other uses, ASTM C55, normal weight. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard brick configured for comers. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M Type N. 1. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 042731 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1 Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O -Wal brand): www.h-b.com. 3. WIRE -BOND: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi) yield strength. 1. Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Unfinished. C. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. D. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM Al 064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. E. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1-1/4 in width, 0.105 in thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Provide with comer and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O -Wal brand): www.h-b.com. c. WIRE -BOND: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; inch wide x by maximum lengths available. C. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Interior, loadbearing masonry; Type N. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 042731 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 2.06 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 2.07 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.08 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. D. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.09 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section 014000 - Quality Requirements. B. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780 recommendations for preconstruction testing. C. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 042731 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perforin job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masomy unit corners or edges. H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcement Bars: Secure at locations indicated and to avoid displacement during grouting. Minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be one bar diameter. B. Joint Reinforcement: Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. C. Anchors: Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 24 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically. D. Wall Ties: Install wall ties at locations and at spacings indicated on the drawings. E. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Keep vertical cores to be grouted clear of mortar, including bed area of first course. 1. Bond Beams: At bond beams or other locations for horizontally reinforced masonry, provide special masonry units or saw to accommodate reinforcement. 3.06 GROUTING A. Perforin all grouting by means of low -lift technique. Do not employ high -lift grouting. B. Low -Lift Grouting: 1. Limit height of pours to 48 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours. 3.07 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and comer joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 042731 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 042731 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 3.08 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C 140/C 140M for conformance to requirements of this specification. B. Mortar Tests: Test mortar in accordance with recommended procedures in ASTM C780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION 042731 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 042731 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 078400 Ithaca, New York FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078400 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2015. B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a. C. ASTM El 966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011). D. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barriers Using Intermediate -Scale, Multi -story Test Apparatus; 2015a. E. ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Resistance of Continuity Head -of -Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies; 2013. F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. G. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. C. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit VOC content documentation for all non - preformed materials. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with ASTM E814. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 078400 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 078400 Ithaca, New York FIRESTOPPING 1. Listing in the current -year classification or certification books of UL will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Trained by the manufacturer. 2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project. 1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. B. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work. C. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. 2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. 3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. 4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. B. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. C. Firestopping Materials with Volatile Content: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. D. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A. Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2307 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the floor assembly. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 078400 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 078400 Ithaca, New York FIRESTOPPING 2. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated. 3. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 4. Where floor assembly is not required to have a fire rating, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. B. Head -of -Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non -Rated Floor and Fire -Rated Wall: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. C. Floor -to -Floor, Wall -to -Wall, and Wall -to -Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire -Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. 2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated. 4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful testing. D. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. 1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated. 2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated. 4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful testing. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING FOR FLOOR -TO -FLOOR, WALL -TO -FLOOR, AND WALL-TO- WALL JOINTS A. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Walls and Floors: 1. Floor to Floor Joints: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System FF -D-1013; Hilti CFS -SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. 2. Concrete/Concrete Masonry Wall to Wall Joints: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW -D-0017; Hilti CFS -SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 078400 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 078400 Ithaca, New York FIRESTOPPING b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW -D-0032; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY CONSTRUCTION A. Blank Openings: 1. In Floors or Walls: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -0090; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. B. Penetrations Through Floors or Walls By: 1. Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -8143; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -1226; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -1425; Hilti CFS -S SIL GG Firestop Silicone Sealant Gun -Grade. 3. Uninsulated Non -Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System System C -AJ -2167; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -2109; Hilti CP 643N/644 Firestop Collar. c. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -BJ -2021; Hilti CP 643N Firestop Collar. 4. Electrical Cables Not In Conduit: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -3216; Hilti CFS -PL Firestop Plug. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W -J-3198; Hilti CFS -SL RK Retrofit Sleeve Kit for existing cables. c. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W -J-3199; Hilti CFS -SL SK Firestop Sleeve Kit. d. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -3283; Hilti CP653 Speed Sleeve. 5. Cable Trays with Electrical Cables: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -4094; Hilti CFS -BL Firestop Block. 6. Insulated Pipes: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -5091; Hilti FS -ONE IMAX intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -5048; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant, CP 604 Self -Leveling Firestop Sealant or CFS - S SIL GG Firestop Silicone Sealant Gun -Grade. 7. HVAC Ducts, Uninsulated: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -7111; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. C. Penetrations Through Floors By: 1. Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 078400 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 078400 Ithaca, New York FIRESTOPPING a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-8012; Hilti CFS -S SIL GG Firestop Silicone Sealant Gun -Grade or CFS -S SIL SL Firestop Silicone Sealant Self - Leveling. 2. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-1016; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast -In Device. 3. Uninsulated Non -Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-2065; Hilti CP 680-P Cast -In Device. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-2213; Hilti CFS -DID Drop -In Device. c. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-2053; Hilti CP 680-P Cast -In Device. 4. Electrical Cables Not In Conduit: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-3033; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast -In Device. 5. Electrical Busways: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-6002; Hilti CP 604 Self -Leveling Firestop Sealant. 6. Insulated Pipes: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-5015; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast -In Device. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F -A-5017; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast -In Device. D. Penetrations Through Walls By: 1. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing: a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W -J-1067; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Electrical Cables Not In Conduit: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -3095; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -3216; Hilti CFS -PL Firestop Plug. 3. Insulated Pipes: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -5090; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -5091; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. c. 1 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -5090; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. d. 1 Hour Construction: UL System C -AJ -5091; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 4. HVAC Ducts, Uninsulated: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W -J-7109; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant or CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 5. HVAC Ducts, Insulated: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W -J-7112; Hilti FS -ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 078400 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 078400 Ithaca, New York FIRESTOPPING 2.05 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by Owner's Independent Testing Agency. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Testing Agency: Inspection agency employed and paid by Owner, will examine penetration firestopping in accordance with ASTM E2174, "Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops and ASTM E2393, "Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stop Joint Systems. B. Repair or replace penetration firestopping and joints at locations where inspection results indicate firestopping or joints do not meet specified requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION 078400 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 078400 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 079200 Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Joint backings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 078400 - FIRESTOPPING: Firestopping sealants. B. Section 088000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion -In -Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2015. C. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. E. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid - Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2000 (Reapproved 2011). F. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes the following. 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4. Substrates the product should not be used on. 5. Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended backing materials and tools. 6. Sample product warranty. 7. Certification by manufacturer indicating that product complies with specification requirements. B. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 079200 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start of installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s) to test each combination of sealant, substrate, backing, and accessories. 1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794. 2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087. 3. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work. 4. Deliver to manufacturer sufficient samples for testing. 5. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or techniques not indicated in product data submittals. 6. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not older than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nonsag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping. 1. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction. 4. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. 5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 6. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com. 2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior- joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b. Other joints indicated below. 2. Do not seal the following types of joints. a. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing device. b. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. c. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. d. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 079200 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 079200 Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS B. Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non -Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 2.03 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL A. Sealants and Pruners: Provide products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than indicated in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD); Rule 1168. 2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Non -Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1 Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Non -Staining To Porous Stone: Non -staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248. 3. Dirt Pick -Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants. 4. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Cure Type: Single -component, neutral moisture curing. 7. Service Temperature Range: Minus 65 to 180 degrees F. 8. Products: B. Type - Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multicomponent; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. C. Type - Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non -staining, non-bleeding, non -sagging; not intended for exterior use. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. END OF SECTION 079200 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 079200 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 090561 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION SECTION 090561 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of floor coverings: 1. Carpet tile. B. Preparation of new and existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 109/C 109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 2013. B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. B. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging; include installation instructions. C. Keep materials from freezing. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 090561 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 090561 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali -resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 109/C 109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate. B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi -layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH) found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. 1. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A. Perforni following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Specified remediation, if required. 3. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 4. Other preparation specified. 5. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 6. Protection. B. Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re -test after correction. 2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire suspect floor area. 3. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area. 3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film -forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 090561 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 090561 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 3.03 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non- moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints. 3.04 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.05 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION 090561 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 090561 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 092116 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Acoustic insulation. D. Gypsum wallboard. E. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015. B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014. C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014. H. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014. J. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 092116 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 1/2" inch. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent -based non -curing butyl sealant. C. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, unless noted otherwise. 1. Architectural Reveal Beads: a. Reveal Depth: 5/8 inch. b. Reveal Width: 1/2 inch. c. Shapes: As shown on drawings. d. Products: 1) Trim -Tex, Inc.; "Z" Shadow Bead: www.trim-tex.com. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold -Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self -piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant. F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to to ceiling framing in accordance with details. C. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 092116 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA -216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Double -Layer Non -Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. C. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION 092116 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 092116 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 095100 Ithaca, New York SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 095100 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2013a. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2013. C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014. D. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2015. E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling finishes, and mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 095100 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 095100 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; : www.armstrong.com. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Panels Type DUNE: 1775. 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Light Reflectance: 0.83 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 3. NRC Range: 0.50 to 1.00, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 4. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 5. Panel Edge: Square Tegular. 6. Surface Pattern: Fine Texture. 7. Surface Color: White. 8. Suspension System: Exposed grid. 9. Products: a. Armstrong "Suprafine" XL 9/16". 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. B. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. F. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 095100 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 095100 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS G. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. H. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above -ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION 095100 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 095100 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 096813 Ithaca, New York TILE CARPETING SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c. C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2015. D. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2015. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. B. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Carpeting: 1. Interface, Inc; Sakura: www.interfaceinc.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Tile Carpeting: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Product: Sakura manufactured by Interface. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 096813 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 096813 Ithaca, New York TILE CARPETING 2. Tile Size: 20 by 20 inch, nominal. 3. Color: As selected by Architect. 4. Pattern: As selected by Architect. 5. Static Control Fiber: (AATCC - 134) < 3.0 KV. 6. Gage: 1/12 inch. 7. Stitches: 8.2 per inch. 8. Pile Weight: 17 oz/sq yd. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Adhesives: C. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Reconunended by carpet tile manufacturer; releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. C. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 096813 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION 096813 SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 096813 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 099123 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. rn). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 099123 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 099123 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 0 g/L. 2. Non -flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 0 g/L. 3. Anti -Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 0 g/L. 5. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 0 g/L. 6. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 7. Dry -Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L. C. Chemical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti -corrosive and anti -rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di -n -butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2 -dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. 1. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1 -trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. D. Colors: As indicated in a finish schedule. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 099123 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following. Operable parts (valves, access panels, etc.) of any mechanical or electrical component that receives paint shall remain fully operable after painting is complete. 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 099123 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 099123 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING h. All existing and new mechanical duct, insulation, equipment above 10 foot limit line. (consult Mechanical designer if item is in question) 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. d. All existing and new electrical conduit, raceways and boxes above 10 foot limit line. (do not paint new light fixtures) E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.03 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1M. a. Prime Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen as indicated on finish schedule. B. CMU Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.2E. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen as indicated on finish schedule. C. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S. a. Prime Coat: Rust -inhibitive primer (water based). b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen as indicated on finish schedule. END OF SECTION 099123 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 099123 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 210500 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Fire -suppression demolition. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIRE -SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 210500 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 210500 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. L. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.03 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. END OF SECTION 210500 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 210500 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 211313 Ithaca, New York WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 211313 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve." Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standard -Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure. B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water -service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard. 3. Minimum Density for Automatic -Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light -Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 -sq. ft. area. 4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. 6. Total Combined Hose -Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated: 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." C. Field quality -control reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems. B. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 211313 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 211313 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Schedule 40, Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. B. Black -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard - weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. C. Galvanized, Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. 2.03 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Tyco. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 3. Viking Corporation. B. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum. C. Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Bronze. D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed -type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 211313 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 211313 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS E. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. F. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. 3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or E. Dissimilar -Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.03 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run excess -pressure pumps. 6. Coordinate with fire -alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Coordinate with fire -pump tests. Operate as required. 8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire -department equipment. C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 211313 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 211313 WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. C. PIP System Cleaning 1. Clean all pipe lines or sections of lines and connected equipment in new or modified systems and/or flush free of all pipe line debris loosened or introduced as a result of this Contract. This shall include removing all debris that has settled or collected at drip legs, strainers, heaters, tanks, etc. Test equipment used for piping tests may be used to circulate cleaning liquids. 2. Clean and disinfect sprinkler distribution piping as follows: a. Purge new and reused distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. b. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. c. Fill system with water/trisodium phosphate (TSP) solution containing at least 1 gallon TSP liquid per 1000 gallon of system volume, isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. d. Drain system of previous solution to sanitary sewer. e. Flush system with clean, potable water until no TSP remains in water corning from system. f Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. g. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. 3.07 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Wet -pipe sprinkler system, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, black -steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3.08 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications: 1. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers. B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated. 1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory -painted white cover plate. END OF SECTION 211313 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 211313 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230500 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. HVAC demolition. 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Supports and anchorages. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230500 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230500 Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch (3.2 -mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Not allowed to be used on Cornell University projects. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300- psig (1035- or 2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 2.04 SLEEVES A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch (0.6 -min) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230500 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.05 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HVAC DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230500 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.03 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230500 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.04 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.06 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 230500 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230500 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230523 Ithaca, New York GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 230523 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. B. Related Sections: 1. `Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter -turn valves NPS 3" and smaller. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 -inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non -thermal -conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. F. Valve -End Connections: 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two -Piece, Regular -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. (Series 70-140 or 70-240) b. Watts Industries. (Series B6000 -SS orB6001-SS) 2. Description: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230523 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230523 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig c. CWP Rating: 400 psig d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: ASTM B584 Cast Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded or soldered. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: 316 Stainless Steel. i. Ball: 316 Stainless Steel. j. Port: Regular. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. END OF SECTION 230523 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230523 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports. B. See Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. • 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230529 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.02 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre -galvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.03 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made from structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U - bolts. 2.04 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.05 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.06 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field -fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230529 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 2. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). G. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500). H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. C -Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. J. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). K. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. L. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Use mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field - fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230529 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230529 Ithaca. New York HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field -assembled metal framing systems. D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded -structural -steel shapes. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, and at changes in direction of piping. J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. L. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on all insulated piping. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: 3. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. 3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment support. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230529 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.06 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 min). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 230529 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230529 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230553 Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe labels. 2. Duct labels. 3. Valve tags. 4. Valve charts 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Self -Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 2.02 DUCT LABELS A. Self -Adhesive Duct Markers: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three- fourths the size of principal lettering. E. Adhesive: Contact -type pennanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. F. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230553 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230553 Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.03 VALVE TAGS A. Brass with stamped numbers and letters (black -filled), 1-1/2 inch round with % inch numbers and % inch letters. B. Fastening shall be by brass "S" hooks, brass jack chains, or brass ball chains. 2.04 VALVE CHARTS A. Valve charts shall be of a sufficient size to provide valve number, size, function, and location. Chart shall have a key plan denoting approximate valve location. Coordinate locations of valve charts with the Owner. B. Valve charts shall be framed in wood or metal frames with Plexiglas cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.02 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and teirnination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Chilled -Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. 2. Heating Water Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 3.03 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Background Color: Blue 2. Letter Color: White Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230553 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230553 Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 230553 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230553 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230593 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: 2. Constant -volume air systems. 3. Variable -air -volume systems. a. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: 4. Constant -flow hydronic systems. 5. Variable -flow hydronic systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. TAB Contractor Qualifications. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." 1.05 P2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230593 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment perfoiniance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality -control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable -air -volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. K. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230593 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper -control positions, valve position indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 2.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct -airflow measurements. D. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. G. Check for airflow blockages. H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. 2.04 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. 2. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. a. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: 3. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. 4. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. 5. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. 6. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. a. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit. 7. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230593 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC a. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. b. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air -handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air -handling - unit performance. c. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full -cooling, full -heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. a. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. b. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2.05 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -AIR -VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Pressure -Independent, Variable -Air -Volume Systems: 1. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply -fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal - unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal -unit discharge system losses. 2. Measure system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 3. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal -unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant -volume air systems. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230593 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 4. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant -volume air systems. 5. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. a. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static - pressure controller at the main supply -air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. b. Record final fan -performance data. 2.06 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch -circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check flow -control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 3. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 4. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow -balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 2.07 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head -capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. a. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. b. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC E. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. 2.08 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat -exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 2.09 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT -TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Unit designation. 2. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 3. Water flow rate. 4. Water pressure drop. 5. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 6. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 7. Airflow. 8. Face velocity. 9. Air pressure drop. 10. Number of rows and fin spacing. 2.10 PROCEDURES FOR AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each air inlet or outlet. 1. Device designation. 2. Location of device, area served. 3. Neck size and area. 4. Airflow. 5. Velocity. 2.11 PROCEDURES FOR TERMINAL DEVICES A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each air inlet or outlet. 1. Unit designation. 2. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 3. Location of device and area(s) served. 4. Unit size. 5. Airflow settings, minimum and maximum. 6. Air pressure drop. 7. Fan, coil and motor data. 2.12 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230593 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 2.13 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: 12. Indicated versus final performance. 13. Notable characteristics of systems. 14. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. a. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. b. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. c. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. d. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: 15. Conditions of filters. 16. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. 17. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. 18. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. END OF SECTION 230593 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230593 - 7 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Insulation materials and accessories 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire - test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory - applied FSK jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory - Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. CertainTeed b. Johns Manville c. Knauf Insualation d. Manson e. Owens Corning G. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory -applied ASJ. For equipment applications, Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION provide insulation with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed b. Johns Manville c. Knauf Insulation d. Manson e. Owens Corning H. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed b. Johns Manville c. Knauf Insulation d. Manson e. Owens Corning 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ- SSL. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 2.02 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.04 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL -C -19565C, Type II. B. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43 -mil (1.09 -mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION 2.05 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 2 inches (50 rnm). 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 rnm). 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mrn) in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 Nhmn) in width. 2.06 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch - (2.6 -mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 2. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch - (0.41 -mm-) thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 min) in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. C. Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062 -inch (1.6 -mm) soft -annealed, galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, foams, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachrnent to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- (75 -mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 nim). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 3.03 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. B. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers. 3.04 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thernometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conforrn to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 3.05 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 min) o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 min), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2 When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 7 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 min) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not over compress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape snatching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 nun) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch (13 - mm) outward -clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18 -foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 nun). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 8 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 nun), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 nun) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch (13 - mm) outward -clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18 -foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattem over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 nun). 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 9 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 min) o.c. 3.06 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire -rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Fire -stop systems are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.07 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.08 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed ducts located in nonconditioned space. 2. Indoor, exposed ducts located in nonconditioned space. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration -control devices. 3. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 3.09 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, Supply -Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: "K" value: 0.22 — 0.25 Btu / in / hour • sgft • °F at 75 °F mean temperature rating, mineral -fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density, with FSK jacket, and vapor retarder. B. Concealed, Outdoor -Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: "K" value: 0.22 — 0.25 Btu / in / hour • sqft • °F at 75 °F mean temperature rating, mineral -fiber board, 2 inches thick and 6-lb/cu. ft. nominal density, with all purpose jacket, and vapor retarder. 3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be one of the following: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230700 - 10 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230700 Ithaca, New York HVAC INSULATION 1. "K" value: 0.22 — 0.27 Btu / in / hour sqft • °F at 100 °F with vapor retarder. 2. Mineral -Fiber Preformed Pipe, Type I: a. 1-1/2 inch pipe and below: 1 inch thick. b. 2 inch pipe and above: 1.5 inch thick. B. Heating -Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: following: 1. "K" value: 0.25 — 0.29 Btu / in / hour • sqft • °F at 125 °F 2. Mineral -Fiber Preformed Pipe, Type I, with ASJ jacket: a. 1-1/2 inch pipe and below: 1 inch thick. b. 2 inch pipe and above: 2 inch thick. END OF SECTION 230700 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation mean temperature rating, Insulation shall be the mean temperature rating. 230700 - 11 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230900 Ithaca, New York INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory - wired controls. B. See Division 23 Section "Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability" for additional requirements that relate to this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device, panel, controller, and accessory indicated; including dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also, include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as cabling and tubing requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic Flow Diagrams: Include point names, point addresses, point type, normal position of output devices, device ranges, setpoints, bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers, and legend of device symbols. a. Damper schedule: Include system served, size, design maximum flow, pressure drop at design maximum flow, manufacturer, model number, fail position, type, size and actuator information. b. Valve schedule: Include equipment served, valve size, CV, design maximum flow, pressure drop at design maximum flow, position of valve at design condition, manufacturer, model number, close -off rating, normal position, valve characteristic, valve turndown, actuator information, and design controlled circuit pressure differential range. c. Control System Architecture Diagram: One -line system architecture diagram indicating schematic location of all hardware, controllers, workstations, wiring diagrams, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN. d. Control Sequences of Operation: Include sequences for each independent system, for all modes of operation (on, off, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool -down, summer, winter, economizer, etc.); detailed steps during mode switches; details of operation during and after a power outage; specific direction on failure scenarios for loss of proof and all safety device trips; setpoints, trip points and ranges; smoke control systems; fire alarm panel interlocks and special operating modes. All related equipment should be grouped together by areas served; in addition to grouping sequences into function sections (start/stop, static pressure control, differential pressure control, heating, cooling, economizer, etc.). e. Points List: In tabular form. Include all physical and virtual points and organize by system/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses, and point types with applicable range as a minimum. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230900 Ithaca, New York INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC f. Alarms and Alarms List: Include the alarm point name, point type, and alarm parameters. g. Floor Plans: Include locations of all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPS's, network components, etc. h. Wiring Diagrams: Include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block number identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram. 1) Field quality -control test reports. 2) Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit and accessory; BACS user's guides for each controller type and for all workstation hardware, software, and workstation peripheral; BACS programming manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. 3) As -Built Documents: i. Hard Copy (General): All drawings and documentation required at the submittal phase, reflecting the final installed condition of the BACS. j. Hard Copy (Control Panels): All the drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. k. Electronic Copy: As submittal and as -built documents shall be provided. Documentation shall be provided in either Microsoft Office format (Work, Excel, etc.) or Adobe Portable Document format (PDF). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. Substitutions are not allowed. 2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Alerton Inc. a. Automated Logic Corporation. 1) Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2) Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token -passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. 2.03 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation. a. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers' memory. Functions include the following: 1) Global communications. 2) Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. 3) Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 4) DDC software applications, alarm processing and buffering software, energy management software. 2. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. 3. Real-time operating system software. 4. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization. 5. Controller diagnostic software. 6. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. B. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-alone functionality. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as OAT, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. C. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. D. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. E. Controllers used for time -scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time - Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230900 Ithaca, New York. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers' clocks via a time master. F. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. G. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. H. UO (physical and virtual) database: Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. J. Trending: To support comrnissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system -level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field -level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. K. Trend Graphs: Web -based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. L. Web -based Graphics: 1. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes associated with each temperature -controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan -coils, single -zone AHU's etc.) on the floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen 2. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic. 3. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens. 4. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 5. Provide system schematic graphics for each air handling system. Indicate OA temperature and relative humidity, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool -down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic. 6. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. UO devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic. 7. Provide a system schematic graphic for each hydronic system. 8. Provide a system schematic graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. 9. Link system schematic screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. 10. Link system schematic screens to all schedules and setpoints a. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. b. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. c. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. d. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low -voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. e. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low -voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC f. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA). g. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. 1) Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current -limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full -wave rectifier type with the following: h. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. i. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. j. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. k. Ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. 1. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5 mV. m. Certification that the equipment will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building's electrical power systems. 1) Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for controllers with the following: n. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. o. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. p. Minimum transverse -mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. q. Minimum common -mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.04 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor and RTD Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. Building Automation Products, Inc. (BAPI) 1) Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group 2) Kele, Inc. 3) MAMAC Systems, Inc. 4) Precon USA 5) Vaisala. 6) Veris Industries b. Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F (0.3 deg C) at calibration point. d. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. e. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, consisting of a sensing element, junction box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel. f Averaging Elements in Ducts: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each two square feet of coil/duct face area. g. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections. h. Room Sensors: 1) Set -Point Adjustment: Provide set -point adjustment and appropriate cabling for all zones. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS system. 2) Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display. 3) Provide sensor with communications jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. 2.05 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Control Relays: Functional Devices, UL listed plug-in type with dust cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration and coil voltage shall be suitable for the application. 2.06 ACTUATORS A. Electronic Actuators: Direct -coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full -stroke cycles at rated torque, and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring return on the actuator with adequate close off force. 1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. b. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. c. Coupling: V -bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. d. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation -sensing circuitry. e. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring -return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. f. Power Requirements (Two -Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. g. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. h. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V do position feedback signal. 2.07 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. a. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. 1) Hydronic system characterizing disk valves shall have the following characteristics: b. NPS 3 and Smaller: Belimo CCV Series, forged brass - nickel plated body, stainless steel ball and stem, fiberglass reinforced Teflon (PTFE) seat, 400 psi Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 7 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230900 Ithaca, New York INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC pressure rating, 0 °F to 212 °F media temperature range, equal percentage flow characteristic on two-way valves, linear flow characteristic on three-way valves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify location of exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches (1220 rnm) above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. a. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1) Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." 3.02 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to the latest version of NFPA 70, National Electric Code. B. Install building wire and cable according to the latest version of NFPA 70, National Electric Code. C. Install signal and communication cable according to the latest version of NFPA 70, National Electric Code. 1. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. a. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. b. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. c. All control wiring above non -accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. d. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHU's shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. e. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device. f. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. g. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. h. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls -related work. i. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. j. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. k. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. 1) Connect hand -off -auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 2) Responsibilities: 3) The BASC contractor wiring responsibilities shall include the following: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 8 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230900 Ithaca, New York INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2. All low voltage wiring associated with the BACS and gas detection systems. 3. All low voltage alarm wiring, including alarrns and functions as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head -end. 4. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except as noted below. 5. All power supply wiring for all BACS components. D. Coordinate with the Electrical contractor to provide the following under their purview: 1. "Lock -out stop" control wiring. 2. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures. 3. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation). 4. All 120 -volt power wiring to support the BACS and gas detection systems. 3.03 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures: 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, UO modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or UO module) and a spare AC outlet. a. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. b. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. c. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. d. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. e. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. f. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. 1) Panel Fabrication g. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. h. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. i. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. j. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. k. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 1. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 9 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230900 Ithaca, New York INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. a. Test and adjust controls and safeties. b. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. c. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. d. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. e. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. f. Test software and hardware interlocks. 1) Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 2) The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to the Owner's representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. C. The Contractor shall include eight hours of training. END OF SECTION 230900 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230900 - 10 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY SECTION 230901 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section provides the communication and interoperability requirements for building automation and control system components to be supplied to Cornell. Because the University's systems have evolved over many years and involve products from multiple vendors and, in several cases, multiple generations of control systems from single vendors, attention must be given to the integration of the old and the new. The objectives of this integration include: providing a mechanism for competitive procurement of building control products; assisting in meeting the University's energy conservation and environmental protection goals; improving the operational systems available to our facilities management and operations staff; reducing, if possible, overall facilities management costs; and providing an infrastructure for optimizing performance in a deregulated utility environment. B. The objectives shall be met by the use, to the extent possible, of existing, widely accepted data communication standards and practices. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSUASHRAE Standard 135-2001: BACnet© - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as "BACnet". American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2001. B. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. C. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. General: In addition to the definitions contained in the applicable standards listed in paragraph 1.03, the following should be noted: 1. ARCNET. Attached Resource Computer Network. See BACnet, Clause 8 and ATA/ANSI 878.1. 2. BACnet/IP. BACnet Annex J Devices. Annex J of BACnet describes how BACnet devices can make use of IP directly for communicating across IP -based intemets. 3. BACnet PICS. A Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement that describes the BACnet capabilities of a specific device. See BACnet, Annex A. 4. BACS. Building Automation and Control System. 5. BBMD. BACnet Broadcast Management Device. See BACnet, Annex J. 6. BMA. BACnet Manufacturers Association. 7. BTL. The BACnet Testing Laboratories of the BMA. The organization responsible for testing products to assure that they conform to the BACnet standard. Listings of tested products are available at www.bacnetassociation.org. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 8. Campus Backbone. A fiber optic data communication infrastructure on the Cornell campus managed by CIT. Users connect to the backbone by means of CIT -supplied Ethernet concentrators in each building and appropriate 10/100BASE-T unshielded, twisted pair wiring. The backbone uses the Internet Protocol for routing messages to and from computers both on and off the Cornell campus. 9. CIT. Cornell Information Technologies. The organization that manages the Cornell campus networking infrastructure, including the provision of network connections in Cornell buildings. 10. Computer Section. The computer group within the Cornell Utilities and Energy Management Department. The Computer Section is responsible for the EMCS and the coordination of BACS device addressing and network numbering. 11. BIBB. BACnet Interoperability Building Block. A collection of one or more BACnet services defined for the purpose of describing communication functionality in an unambiguous way. See BACnet, Annex K. 12. Device Profile. A collection of BIBBs that describes the minimum BACnet capabilities of a particular device in order to achieve reliable communication in one of five specified "interoperability areas." Devices include BACnet Building Controllers (B -BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), and BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B -ASC). See BACnet, Annex L. 13. EMCS. A computer complex, housed at Chilled Water Plant 1, that provides Energy Management and Control System functions for the University. The EMCS is connected to the campus backbone and uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for the routing of messages to and from individual buildings. 14. Ethernet. A carrier sensing multiple access with collision detection network technology defined by ISO/IEC 8802-3. 15. Gateway. A device that translates BACnet messages into those of a non-BACnet protocol and vice -versa. 16. Internetwork. A set of two or more BACnet networks interconnected by routers. 17. Interoperability Area. A communications domain in which functional cooperation is desired. These areas are currently: 1) data sharing; 2) alarm and event management; 3) trending; 4) scheduling; and 5) device and network management. See BACnet, Clause 22. 18. IP. The Internet Protocol. A networking protocol originally developed by the federal Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. BACnet messages can traverse the campus backbone by being encapsulated in routable IP packets. 19. Local. Pertaining to the requirements of a specific job or building project. 20. LAN. Local Area Network. One of the approved BACnet network technologies: Ethernet, ARCNET or MS/TP. 21. MS/TP. Master-Slave/Token-Passing Network. One of the approved BACnet LANs. See BACnet, Clause 9. 22. Network. One of the communication technologies for data communications specified in BACnet. Approved network technologies at Cornell are Ethernet, ARCNET and MS/TP. 23. PICS. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A document that describes in detail a device's BACnet capabilities. See BACnet, Annex A. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 24. UDP. The User Datagram Protocol. One of the IP family of protocols. UDP is used to convey BACnet/IP messages and is characterized by a "port number" for each protocol. BACnet/IP typically uses UDP port X'BACO' or decimal 47808. 25. VLAN. Virtual Local Area Network. A network configuration that allows devices to communicate across multiple physical local area networks (LANs) using their hardware or "medium access control" (MAC) addresses as if they shared a common networking medium. As with a physical LAN, "local" broadcast messages are also propagated to each of the participating LANs. VLAN capability depends on the configuration of the interconnecting data communication equipment. VLAN configuration is performed by CIT. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to any requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall provide both proposed and as -built versions of the following: 1. Schematic drawings that represent the system architecture and configuration in both hardcopy and editable electronic format. 2. A points list that includes, for each physical or logical point, the name, description, display units, alarm limits and definitions, along with the BACnet object description, object ID, and associated device ID. The list shall also indicate whether Trend Log or Schedule objects have been established for the point. 3. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations utilized detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumerated values. 4. PICS files indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each device. In addition to the requirements of BACnet, Annex A, the Contractor shall provide information on any limitations on the numbers of supported objects in a given device including, specifically, Trend Log and Schedule objects. 5. Documentation on submitted products that have been tested and listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL), or provide a letter on manufacturer's company letterhead indicating the anticipated date by which testing is expected to be completed. If, for any reason, BTL testing and listing has not been completed, a written commitment shall be provided to upgrade installed controls to a version that meets BTL testing and listing requirements should deficiencies be found during BTL testing. 1.05 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination of subcontractors' work relative to the BACS. Specific questions relating to communication and interoperability shall be submitted to the Computer Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Each networked device supplied pursuant to this section shall be installed and configured so as to correctly execute all sequences of operation for its intended application, as defined in other sections of this specification. In addition, each networked device shall provide, at a minimum, the BACnet communication capabilities prescribed in the device profiles for devices of its type. See 2.02. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Controller Requirements: Controller devices supplied to meet the functional and operational requirements of this specification shall conform, at a minimum, to one the BACnet device profiles contained in BACnet, Annex L: BACnet Building Controller (B -BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC), or BACnet Application Specific Controller (B -ASC). The interoperability requirements of such devices are contained in BACnet, Annex L. B -BC controller devices shall communicate using BACnet/IP. Other devices may use BACnet over ARCNET or BACnet over MS/TP. B. Router Requirements: In the event that devices are provided that do not use BACnet/IP over Ethernet as their communication technology, BACnet routers shall be provided that route between BACnet/IP over Ethernet and the other BACnet LAN type(s), whether ARCNET or MS/TP. These routers shall conform to the specifications of BACnet, Clause 6. C. Gateways: BACS devices that use BACnet as their native protocol are preferred. The use of gateways, in circumstances where no native BACnet devices are available, requires the specific approval of the Owner in each instance. D. Workstation Requirements: The EMCS operator interface is the responsibility of the Computer Section. If, however, a specific job requires a local workstation, the Contractor shall provide a personal computer of current design and approved by the Owner equipped with a web browser that can display information from a Contractor - supplied web server that interfaces with the local BACnet network and the campus backbone, as described 2.02.E. E. Web Server Requirements: If a local workstation is required, the Contractor shall comply with 2.02.D and shall, in addition, provide a web server computer with the web page presentation, data acquisition, and storage functionality described in this section, including the specific functions listed below. The web server shall be configured in such a way that there is no limit to the number of simultaneous users. 1. Data Sharing: a. Presentation of data (i.e., user definable reports and graphics) b. The ability to monitor and display the values of all BACnet object types, including all required and optional properties c. The ability to modify setpoints and parameters d. Alarm and Event Management: 1) Operator notification and presentation of event information 2) Alarm acknowledgment by operators 3) Alarm summarization 4) Adjustment of alarm limits 5) Adjustment of alarm routing e. Scheduling: 1) Modification of schedules 2) Display of the start and stop times (schedule) of scheduled devices f. Trending: 1) Modification of the parameters of a trend log 2) Display and archive of trend log data Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY g. Device and Network Management: 1) Display of information about the status of any device on the local BACnet network 2) Display of information about any object in the local BACnet network 3) Ability to silence a device on the network that is transmitting erroneous data 4) Ability to cause a remote device to reinitialize itself 5) Ability to backup and restore the configuration of devices on the local BACnet network 6) Ability to query and change the configuration local BACnet routers 2.03 NETWORK CONNECTIONS A. This clause prescribes the means of interconnecting building automation and control devices provided pursuant to this specification. B. LANs: 1. All control devices meeting the B -BC device profile shall be connected to an ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) LAN provided by the Contractor. This LAN, in turn, shall be connected to the campus backbone network. Unless otherwise specified, the connection shall be via a 10/100BASE-T port provided by the Owner. 2. The location of the jack will be determined in consultation with the Computer Section, which will arrange with CIT for the jack's installation. The Contractor shall also provide any additional data communication hardware, such as hubs and repeaters, that may be needed to interconnect the supplied BACS equipment and to connect to Owner's backbone network. 3. To facilitate maintenance technician access to the LAN, the Contractor shall also provide at least one additional 10/100BASE-T access point in each mechanical room that contains BACS equipment. This requirement may be met by supplying either a hub with a spare port or a dedicated jack. 4. Control devices that meet the B -ASC profile, but do not support Ethernet, must use another approved BACnet LAN technology. These technologies are ARCNET and MS/TP. If Ethernet is not supported on any part of the internetwork, a stand- alone BACnet router, or a BACnet Building Controller with built-in routing capability, must be provided for routing between the Ethernet and ARCNET or MS/TP LANs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. This clause provides specific interoperability and networking requirements that pertain to the use of BACnet. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS BY INTEROPERABILITY AREA A. This clause provides requirements pertaining to the five interoperability areas of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. B. Data Sharing: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 1. Data Sharing requirements apply to the exchange of information between BACnet devices for archival storage, generating graphics and reports, the sharing of common sensor or calculated values, carrying out interlocked control strategies, and the modification of setpoints or other operational parameters. 2. All such data to be exchanged shall be represented as BACnet objects and conveyed using BACnet messages. Only standard BACnet objects and messages may be used to implement data sharing requirements unless the non-standard extensions are explicitly approved by the Owner. Any extensions to BACnet shall be fully documented in the manner used within the BACnet standard. Submission of such documentation is a prerequisite for obtaining approval of an extension. 3. Points List: The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with all points indicated in the BACS points list. The Contractor shall provide any additional points needed to fully implement the sequence of operations and other functionality described in this specification. 4. Data Presentation: In the event that workstation/web server capabilities have been specified, the following characteristics shall apply to graphic displays: a. The graphic displays shall include schematic diagrams of the systems being displayed. b. When a graphic display is being viewed all values displayed shall be updated when a change of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV is not implemented, within five seconds. c. Any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at a workstation in real time. The operator shall be able to select binary and analog data concurrently and to plot multiple instances of each data type on the same screen. The operator shall be able to select sampling intervals from 1 second to 60 seconds. For devices that implement COV reporting, the operator shall be able to select this as the means to update the plot. d. Monitoring of Any Property: The operator shall be able to display any value of any property of any object from any networked device including all properties required by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions. e. Global Object Definitions: The control system shall be configured with system -wide unique BACnet objects as needed to convey all globally significant infonnation necessary to implement the control strategy. f Setpoint and Parameter Modifications: Operators with appropriate authority shall be able to modify all control loop setpoints and tuning parameters via BACnet messages initiated through operator interaction with graphics displays. g. Peer -to -Peer Data Dependencies: All BACnet devices shall be installed and configured to exchange data values directly, without the need for operator or workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the mechanical system drawings and to share global data values. C. Alarm and Event Management: 1. Alarm and Event management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the occurrence of predefined conditions that meet specific criteria. Such conditions are called "events" and may be the basis for the initiation of a particular Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 230901 Ithaca, New York BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY control action in response, or the simple logging of the event's occurrence. The event may also be deemed to represent a condition that constitutes an "alarm" requiring human acknowledgment and intervention. 2. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet event detection and notification mechanisms. Either intrinsic reporting or algorithmic change reporting may be used, but the intrinsic reporting method is preferred. See BACnet Clause 13. 3. Alarm Lists a. The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured to detect alarms and events for the points indicated in the system drawings. Software logic shall be provided to avoid nuisance alarms, e.g., no temperature or status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running, or during start-up and shut -down transitions. It shall be possible to configure a delay between the occurrence of an alarm condition and its enunciation. b. Alarms shall appear at the EMCS and any local operator workstation(s) within five seconds of their occurrence. The workstations shall display an alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows. The alarrn message window shall have a distinctive color and appearance to attract the operator's attention. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to configure the workstation to emit an audible signal (or not) when an alarm message is received. c. Alarms that require operator acknowledgement shall cause the alarm window to remain active until such an acknowledgement is received. If multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed on a first come first served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority alarms displayed first. d. Alarms shall be distributed using the BACnet notification class mechanism. Assignment of classes and destinations shall be configured according to details provided by the Owner. One destination shall, in all cases, be the EMCS. e. BACnet provides a mechanism for prioritizing alarm and event notification messages using a numerical range of 0-255 with 0 being the highest priority and 255 being the lowest priority. The priorities presented in the Table 1 are consistent with the safety requirements of UL 864 (applies to fire systems) and UL 1076 (applies to security systems). ALARM AND EVENT NOTIFICATION PRIORITIES SHALL BE CONFIGURED IN THE PRIORITY RANGE AS INDICATED IN TABLE 1 (SEE END OF SECTION) AND SHALL BE CONVEYED USING THE INDICATED NETWORK PRIORITY. 230901 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 230901 - 7 February 29, 2016 SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING • GENERAL • SUMMARY • This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and specialties for the following: • Chilled -water piping. • SUBMITTALS • Product Data: • Piping and accessories. • Water cleaning chemicals. • Material Safety Data Sheets: Water cleaning chemicals. • QUALITY ASSURANCE • ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. • PRODUCTS • COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS • Drawn -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L • Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. • Wrought -Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. • JOINING MATERIALS 1 • Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. • DIELECTRIC FITTINGS • Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. • Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. • Dielectric Unions: Not acceptable for use on campus. • Dielectric Couplings: • Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). • VALVES • Bronze, Calibrated -Orifice, Balancing Valves: • Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: • Armstrong Pumps, Inc. • Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. • Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America • Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. • Ball: Brass or stainless steel. • Plug: Resin. • Seat: PTFE. • End Connections: Threaded or socket. • Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. • Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. • CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa). • Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C). • AIR CONTROL DEVICES • Manual Air Vents: 2 • Body: Bronze. • Internal Parts: Nonferrous. • Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. • Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). • Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6). • CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). • Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C). • • HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES • • Test Plugs: • Body and Cap Material: Brass • End Connection: NPT 1/2 • Core for Chilled Water Systems: Neoprene • EXECUTION • PIPING APPLICATIONS • Chilled -water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following: • Type L, drawn -temper copper tubing, wrought -copper fittings, and soldered joints. • VALVE APPLICATIONS • Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. • Install calibrated -orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each cooling terminal. • PIPING INSTALLATIONS • Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 3 • Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. • Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. • Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. • Install piping to permit valve servicing. • Install piping at indicated slopes. • Install piping free of sags and bends. • Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. • Install piping to allow application of insulation. • Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. • Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. • Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. • Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. • Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. • Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. • Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." • Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. • Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 4 • HANGERS AND SUPPORTS • Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. • Install the following pipe attachments: • Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping. • Install hangers for drawn -temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: • NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). • NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). • NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). • NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). • NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). • PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION • Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. • Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. • Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. • Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. • HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION • Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. 5 • TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS • Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. • Install test ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. • CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT • Cleaning: Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated from the existing building system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final connection to the existing building system. Cleaning procedures shall be as follows: • Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the cleaning and treatment process. • Step 2: Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological matter at a concentration recommended by the chemical manufacturer. Pay particular attention to the type of material being cleaned (steel, copper, aluminum, etc.) Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system until system water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab. • Step 3: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab. B. Treatment: Fill system with potable water. Notify The Central Energy Plant (CEP) for permission to begin circulating water into the campus chilled water loop. • C.Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Pipe Shop prior to final acceptance. • FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: • Leave joints uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. • Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. • Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. • Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. 6 • Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: • Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. • While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. • Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. • Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." • After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. • Prepare written report of testing. • Perform the following before operating the system: • Open manual valves fully. • Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and bleed air completely. END OF SECTION 232113 7 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct -mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop -fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static -pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration isolation. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire -rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Piping and major electrical conduits. d. Access panels. E. Welding certificates. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct / Transverse Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct / Longitudinal Seams," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Figure 4-2 Rectangular Elbows: Use Types RE 1, RE 2, or RE 3 only. Use of a 90° square throat on Types RE 1 and RE 3 is unacceptable. 2. Figure 4-6 Branch Connections: Use a 45° entry on rectangular taps, and a 45° lead-in on round taps to rectangular mains. 3. Figure 4-5 Divided Flow Branches: Use Type 1, Type 2, Type 4A or 4B. 2.02 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Use an R/D Ratio of 1.5 for all duct velocities. E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals." for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Use 45° Lateral Fittings, 45° Lateral Taps, 45° Saddle Taps, and 45° lead-in on rectangular taps to round ducts. 2.03 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B. D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 min). 2.04 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single -component, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. E. Round Duct Joint 0 -Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10 -inch wg (2500 -Pa) static -pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM 0 -ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double -lipped, EPDM 0 -ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory -fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium -plated steel rods and nuts. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop -fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m). F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.04 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static -pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3 -micron -size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233113 Ithaca, New York METAL DUCTS D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. 3.05 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.06 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply Ducts: 1. Ductwork downstream of VAVs: a. Material: G90 Galvanized. b. Pressure Class: Positive 2 -inch wg c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. e. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. END OF SECTION 233113 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233113 - 7 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233300 Ithaca, New York AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 0.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Turning vanes. 3. Duct -mounted access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Duct accessory hardware. 0.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire -damper installations, including sleeves; and duct -mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 0.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." Olin Hall — Suite 270 Renovation 233300 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233300 Ithaca, New York AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 0.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Exposed -Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 0.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Nailor Industries Inc c. Ruskin Company 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat -shaped, galvanized or stainless steel channels, 16 ga. minimum thickness. Match adjoining duct material. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple blade. b. Opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized or Stainless-steel, 16 ga. thick. Match adjoining duct material. 6. Blade Axles: Stainless steel. Olin Hall — Suite 270 Renovation 233300 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233300 Ithaca, New York AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch- (2.4 -mm-) thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 0.3 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". 0.4 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Duct -Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Hinges and Latches: 1 -by -1 -inch (25 -by -25 -mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches. Olin Hall — Suite 270 Renovation 233300 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233300 Ithaca, New York AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 0.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4 -inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5 -inch wg (125 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fm (20 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 79 deg C). 4. Insulation R -Value: R-5. 0.6 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct -insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 0.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Elsewhere as indicated. G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. Olin Hall — Suite 270 Renovation 233300 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233300 Ithaca, New York AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES H. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). I. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. K. Connect diffusers to ducts with maximum 60 -inch (1500 -mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. L Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 0.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 233300 Olin Hall — Suite 270 Renovation 233300 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233713 Ithaca, New York DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES SECTION 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Manufacturers — Metal Diffusers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Anemostat 2. Krueger 3. Price Industries 4. Titus. B. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable -air -volume flows. C. Metal Supply Diffusers: 1. Material: Steel, Welded Border 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Size: 24 -inches by 24 -inches 4. Mounting: 9/16 -inch Tegular Narrow Tee, Lay -in 5. Pattern: Four-way 6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233713 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233713 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233714 Ithaca, New York CHILLED BEAMS SECTION 233714 CHILLED BEAMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Active chilled beams 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Operating weights, dimensions and finish of all unit assemblies. 2. Performance data, including sensible cooling capacities, nozzle types, primary and total (primary plus induced) supply airflow rates, chilled water flow rates, noise levels in NC, air and water side pressure losses and supply air throw values. Indicate the maximum and minimum airflows where each beam can operate properly, their respective sensible capacity and the respective air and water pressure drop. 3. Performance printouts for the chilled beam showing the air pattern discharge within the space. 4. Construction details including manufacturers recommendations for installation, mounting and connection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACTIVE CHILLED BEAMS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a 2 -pipe cooling only active Chilled Beam by Trox. No substitutions will be allowed. The intent is to match existing active chilled beams already installed in the space. B. General: Chilled Beam is to be an integrated system for ventilation and cooling. The active chilled beams shall consist of a steel housing encasing the integral sensible only cooling coil and a plenum feeding a series of induction nozzles, and a face including a grille and diffusers. The Bhilled Beam is to be active with primary ventilation introduced through the top duct connection. Beam to have adjustable air flow, cooling effect and flow pattern. C. Configuration: Provide active chilled beams of sizes, capacities, discharge and nozzle types as scheduled on the drawings. The beams shall be constructed and delivered to the job site as a single unit. D. Housing: 20 gauge steel encasing the sensible cooling coil and a plenum feeding a series of induction nozzles. Plenum casing shall be unfinished galvanized steel. E. The face of the beam shall consist of a room air induction section of 50% free area perforated galvanneal steel mounted in a hinge down section with 2 locking pins, flanked by two linear supply slots bordered by steel borders. Two piece induction faces shall not be acceptable. F. The entire visible face section shall be finished in standard white powder coat paint. G. Beams must be available with a minimum of six (3) separate formed metal nozzle configurations which allow the designer to maximize the heat transfer and primary Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233714 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233714 Ithaca, New York CHILLED BEAMS airflow capacities of the units. Plastic or adjustable nozzles are not acceptable. Should adjustable nozzles be used they must be factory set and locked to project specific guidelines prior to shipment. H. Beams shall be provided with side and end details which will allow integration into a 9/16 -inch tegular acoustical ceiling suspension grid. I. Beams shall be provided with connections that accommodate a 2 pipe coil operation. The coils shall be mounted at an angle of at least 45° to allow any condensation that may be formed to flow into a factory mounted condensation tray. The coil shall be manufactured with seamless copper tubing (?" outside diameter) with minimum .016 inch wall thickness mechanically fixed to aluminum fins. The aluminum fins shall be limited to no more than eight (8) fins per inch. The beam shall have a maximum working pressure of 200 PSI, be factory tested for leakage at a minimum pressure of 500 PSI. Each chilled beam shall be provided with factory integrated drain fittings on each water circuit J. Coil connections shall be %2" NPT male threaded fittings for connect to the water supply circuit. Connections shall face upwards and shall be at least 1%" long to facilitate field connection. Turned or straight connections are not acceptable as connection would interfere with ceiling grid and other above ceiling services. Beam shall be constructed so that the coil connection location can be field modified without cutting or modifying or otherwise disturbing the structural integrity of the active chilled beam housing K. Beams shall be delivered clean, flushed and capped to prevent ingress of dirt. Beams shall be individually boxed and all air and water connections shall be covered with a protective seal, which will prevent dust and other contaminants from entering the beam. The face shall remain protected by a factory applied adhesive film until the beams have been maneuvered into their final resting position. L. Each beam shall be provided with factory integrated air vents on each water circuit. M. Provided hoses eighteen (18) inches in length and suitable for operation. Such hoses shall be 100% tested and certified for no leakage at 400 PSI (1600 PSI burst) on '/2" hoses. Connector hoses shall consist of an EPDM lined hose with a wire braided jacket. The hoses shall be suitable for operation in an environment between -40 and 200°F. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium -plated steel rods and nuts. B. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. C. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. D. Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233714 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 233714 Ithaca, New York CHILLED BEAMS 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Coils shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 410, but their cooling capacities shall be established in accordance to DIN Standard 4715 for the specific application on the inlet side of the submitted chilled beam. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the size, tagging and capacity of the beams to their proper location B. Install units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. C. Chilled beams up to (and including) six feet in length shall be independently suspended from the structure at four (4) points either by threaded rods of ?" diameter or another approved suspension method. For beams beyond six feet in length, six (6) points of support shall be provided. The support members shall be fixed to factory furnished mounting brackets on the beam. The beam shall then be positioned into the acoustical ceiling grid and leveled. D. Before connecting the supply water system(s) to the beams, contractor shall flush the piping system(s) to assure that all debris and other matter have been removed. The beam shall be supplied pre -flushed and clean. E. Connect beams to the chilled water circuit by using flexible hoses. 3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Mechanical expansion inserts shall be used to attach units to the structure. The use of powder -actuated fasteners is not allowed. END OF SECTION 233714 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 233714 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519 Ithaca, New York LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves for cables. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, or XHHW. C. Multi -conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal -clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.03 SLEEVES FOR CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260519 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519 Ithaca, New York LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES PART 1 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for No. 14 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Metal -clad cable. B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. 3.04 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260519 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519 Ithaca, New York LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. H. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." I Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." J. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perforin tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260519 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526 Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure- type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. PART 1 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install stranded conductor for 10 gauge AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260526 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1 Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs. 6. Armored and metal -clad cable runs. B. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct - mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260526 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526 Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260526 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260529 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 260529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, [zinc -coated] [stainless] steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP -58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for attached structural element. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260529 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. PART 1 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to cany present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP -69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260529 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529 Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic -restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260529 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533 Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 0 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. EMT: ANSI C80.3. B. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT: set -screw or compression type. 2.02 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Dual -channel, painted steel with snap -on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect/Engineer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. 2.03 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. PART 1 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260533 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533 Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 -inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 -degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-1b tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire and tie off securely. I. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for luminaire equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 3.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 260533 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260533 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553 Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. C. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Snap -Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and cable tie for attachrnent to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260553 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553 Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.02 ARMORED AND METAL -CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSIA13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. C. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. 2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, perrnanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. D. Snap -Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260553 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553 Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. D. System Identification Color -Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color - coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two- color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested areas. E. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal -Clad Cables, 600V or less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits more than 50 A, and 120V to ground: Install labels at 30 -foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Metal -Clad Cables 600V or less, install labels at 30 -foot maximum intervals. C. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. Fire Alarm. D. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 600V or less: Use color -coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600V or less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded branch -circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. E. Install instructional sign including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive -film -type labels. F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260553 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Screw mounted, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide five lines of text: 1) First line: 1/2 -inch letters on the first line stating equipment name. 2) Second line (if applicable): 3/8 -inch letters stating the existing equipment name in Parentheses (). 3) Third line: 3/8 -inch letters stating voltage/phase. 4) Fourth line: 3/8 -inch letters stating the breaker number, panel name and room number/name (Owner's room number) from which the equipment is fed. 5) Fifth line: 3/8 -inch letters stating function and/or equipment which it controls. 5. Receptacle Labeling: Label shall be using Dymo Posiprinter, black lettering on clear tape stating panel and breaker number from which it is fed. 6. Equipment to be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Fire -alarm control panel, annunciators, devices. d. Receptacles. END OF SECTION 260553 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 260553 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262726 Ithaca, New York WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.02 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and color: white. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; HBL5361 (single), CR5352 (duplex). b. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). c. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 2.03 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20A, color: white: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; HBL1221 (single pole), HBL1222 (two pole), HBL1223 (three way), HBL1224 (four way). b. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). c. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 262726 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262726 Ithaca, New York WIRING DEVICES 2.04 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 2.05 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Norinal Power System: white. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, or as indicated on the drawings. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 262726 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262726 Ithaca, New York WIRING DEVICES 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1 Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 5. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 262726 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 271500 Ithaca, New York COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. Unless noted otherwise all work included in this section is included in the data cable contract. 1.02 SCOPE A. Horizontal cabling includes Category 6 UTP from the Telecommunications Rooms (TR) to the outlets as shown on the plans and called for in the cable schedules. The horizontal cabling includes all horizontal cables, mechanically terminated jacks/inserts and faceplates in the work area and the mechanical termination in the TR. B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. UTP Cable for Data 2. UTP Cable for Voice 3 Cable Terminations 4. Connecting Hardware 5. Wall Phone Outlets 6. Firestopping 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacturer indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval B. Strictly adhere to all Category 6 (BICSI and TIA) and manufacturer recommended installation practices when installing high performance cabling. C. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of Cornell University. D. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacturer indicated. E. Provide with the submittals, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating that the complete assembly including cable and termination hardware has been tested and meets the performance criteria called for. F. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSUTIA/EIA— 568B.1, B.2 and B.2-1 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA — 569A 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA — 568-A-5 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA — 606A 5. ISO/IEC 11801— 2002 (or newer edition) 6. NFPA 70 — 2005 (or newest edition) Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 1 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 7. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 8. Cornell University Design and Construction Standards, current Edition 9. National Electrical Installation Standards (NECA-NEIS) 10. FCC 47 CFR 68 11. NEMA - 250 12. NEC - Articles 770, 800,810. 13. ADA, Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all cable and connecting hardware. B. Evidence of manufacturer's certification to install and warrant UTP, copper backbone and optical fiber cables. C. Termination details for all cable types. D. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. (Include names and phone numbers of references at the site of installation.) E. Cable Test Reports (two weeks minimum). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 100 OHM UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE A. Shall be Category 6 type cable compliant with the requirements of the most current ANSUTIA/EIA 568B standard. B. Shall be independently verified to comply with ANSUTIA/EIA 568B.2-1. C. An ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer shall make the cable. D. Cable shall be UL LISTED. E. Physical Characteristics: 1. Shall be CMR rated and meet applicable requirements of ANSI/ICEA-S-80-576 and NEC. 2. Conductor shall be 24 AWG solid bare annealed copper. 3. Outer jacket color shall be blue or as directed by Owner. 4. Category marking shall be printed every one foot. Footage indicators shall also be provided on jacket. 5. The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be .023 in. maximum. 6. Shall consist of (4) 22-26 AWG twisted pairs. 7. Shall be suitable for the environment in which they are to be installed. 8. The color coding of pairs shall be: Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3 Pair 4 W -BL; BL W -O; 0 W -G; G W -BR; BR 9. The overall diameter of the cable shall be less than 0.250 inches. If the approved submittal indicates a cable outside diameter greater than 0.250, refer to additional requirements for pathway resizing and coordination in Part 3 of this section. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 2 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 10. The ultimate breaking strength measured in accordance with ASTM D 4565 shall be 400 N minimum. 11. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1 inch at -20 degrees Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking. 12. Cable shall be third party verified to meet ANSUTIA/EIA 568-B.2-1, Category 6 requirements. F. Transmission Characteristics: 1. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801 category 6 compliant. 2. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with TIA/EIA 568B.2-1 and shall be a maximum of 19.8dB @ 100 MHz. 3. Cable shall exhibit positive PSACR above 250 MHz. 4. Cable shall be tested & characterized to 500 MHz. 5. Cable shall be UL LISTED. a. Cable shall exhibit a NEXT loss of at least the following: Freque NEXT dB ncy MHz 1.0 78 4.0 69 10.0 63 16.0 60 20.0 58 31.25 55 62.5 51 100.0 48 200 44 250 42 b. Cable shall exhibit a ELFEXT loss of at least the following: Frequence MHz ELFEXT 1.0 75 4.0 63 10.0 55 16.0 51 20.0 49 31.25 45 62.5 39 100.0 35 200 29 250 27 c. Cable shall exhibit Attenuation loss of less than the following Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 3 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING Frequency MHz Attenuation dB 1.0 2.0 4.0 3.8 10.0 6.0 16.0 7.6 20.0 8.5 31.25 10.7 62.5 15.4 100.0 19.8 200 29.0 250 32.58 d. Cable shall exhibit a return loss according to the following: Frequency MHz Return Loss (dB) 1 20.0 4 23.0 10 25.0 16 25.0 20 25.0 31.25 23.6 32.5 21.5 100 20.1 200 18.0 250 17.3 G. Design Make: CommScope/SYSTIMAX GigaSPEED XL -Series, 4 -pair, CMR Riser rated with blue jacket. H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. None 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTING HARDWARE - 100 OHM UTP A. Physical Characteristics 1. Each UTP cable will be terminated at the outlet with a Mini -corn Executive Series 8 position 8 wire T568A coded Category 6 RJ45 modular jack. 2. Jacks shall be 8 position un -keyed. 3. The manufacturer shall have conducted performance testing at the component level by a UL certified testing laboratory, and include Active Live Channel Testing to insure manufacture and performance quality. 4. Jack housings shall be high impact 94 V-0 rated thermoplastic. 5. Jack modules shall have a temperature rating of -10 °C (14°F) to 60°C (140 °F) in conformance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. 6. Jack modules shall be used in all work areas and shall exceed the connector requirements of the TIA/EIA Category 6 standard. 7. Jack modules shall be 100% tested to ensure NEXT performance. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 4 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 8. Jack modules shall be universal in design, including complying with the intermateability standard IEC 60603-7 for backward compatibility. 9. Category 6 modules shall have UL and CSA approval. 10. The modules shall be able to be re -terminated a minimum of 10 times. 11. The modules shall have ETL verified Category 6 performance and ISO Class E performance (as defined in ISO/IEC 11801) in both the basic and channel links. They shall be universal in design, accepting six or eight -pair modular plugs without damage to the outer module contacts. 12. Jack modules shall have a designation indicating Category 6 compliance. Jack module shall also have a date code and a complete catalog number and abbreviated series numbers indicated on each module. 13. Jacks shall utilize a paired punch down sequence. Cable pair twists shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer. 14. The module shall snap into all Mini -Com outlets and patch panels. 15. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG unshielded twisted pair cable, stranded or solid conductors. 16. Jacks shall terminate insulated conductors with outside diameters up to .050". 17. Jacks shall be compatible with single conductor 110 impact termination tools. 18. Jacks shall include translucent wire termination/retention stuffer cap, that holds terminated wires in place, provides positive locking latch to proper conductor strain relief on the cable jacket, and allow the conductors to be visually inspected in the assembled housing can ensure cable twists can be maintained to within 1/8" (3.18mm). 19. Jack modules shall be compatible with TIA/EIA 606-A color code labeling and each module shall include a label marked with both T -568A and T -568B wiring schemes. 20. The jack module shall include an identification to signify Category 6, 330 MHz performance. 21. Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro -inches of gold. 22. Jack modules shall be manufactured in the USA. B. Jack modules shall be UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified. C. Jack modules shall be made by an ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer. D. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel with a category 6 patch panel and category 6 patch cords, all from the same manufacturer and designed to be installed together, along with a qualified category 6 cable shall meet or exceed the channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. E. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel NEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified, and meet or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Frequency NEXT MHz dB Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 5 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York 1.0 4.0 8.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 200.0 250.0 SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 65.0 63.0 58.2 56.6 53.2 51.6 50.0 48.4 43.4 39.9 34.8 33.1 F. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel PSNEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meet or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Frequency PSNEXT MHz dB 1.0 62.0 4.0 60.5 8.0 55.6 10.0 54.0 16.0 50.6 20.0 49.0 25.0 47.3 31.25 45.7 62.5 40.6 100.0 37.1 200.0 31.9 250.0 30.2 G. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel Insertion Loss of not more than the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meet or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Frequency Insertion LOSS MHz dB 1.0 2.1 4.0 4.0 8.0 5.7 10.0 6.3 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 6 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16.0 8.0 20.0 9.0 25.0 10.1 31.25 11.4 62.5 16.5 100.0 21.3 200.0 31.5 250 35.9 H. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel ELFEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meet or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSUTIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Frequency ELFEXT MHz dB 1.0 63.3 4.0 51.2 8.0 45.2 10.0 43.3 16.0 39.2 20.0 37.2 25.0 35.3 31.25 33.4 62.5 27.3 100.0 23.3 200.0 17.2 250.0 15.3 I. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel PSELFEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meet or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Frequency PSELFEXT MHz DB 1.0 60.3 4.0 48.2 8.0 42.2 10.0 40.3 16.0 36.2 20.0 34.2 25.0 32.3 31.25 30.4 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 7 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York 62.5 100.0 200.0 250.0 SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 24.3 20.3 14.2 12.3 J. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a channel return loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meet or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Frequency Return Loss MHz DB 1.0 19.0 4.0 19.0 8.0 19.0 10.0 19.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 17.5 25.0 17.0 K. Jack modules installed in a 4 -connector channel shall exhibit a delay skew of not more than 50 ns/100 m between 1 and 250 MHz. L. Confirm color and orientation requirements with Owner before ordering. M. Modular Jack Design Make: 1. Panduit Mini -Com TX6 Plus Jack Module TP Series, T568A, Electric Ivory (or color to match existing conditions, or as called for) - Panduit # CJ688TPEI Series. 2.03 FACEPLATE DESIGN MAKES AND OPTIONS: A. Double Gang — Panduit CBEEI-2G Minicom executive series, 8 module, Ivory, Plastic. B. Double Gang, Stainless — Panduit CFP8S-2G Minicom Stainless Steel Series, 8 module. C. Single Gang Vertical four port — CBEE series, upon special approval by Owner. D. Single Gang Horizontal four port — Panduit #CFPHSL4EI series, on special approval by Owner. E. Box/Surface Mount, 2 -module Panduit # CBXJ2EI-A. F. Bezel Insert Sloped 2 -module space Ivory - Panduit #CHS2EI-X (10pk). G. Bezel Insert Flat Blank 2 -module wide Ivory - Panduit # CHB2EI-X. H. Confirm color, orientation and sloped vs. flush jack module configuration requirements with Owner before ordering. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 8 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING I. Review stainless steel faceplate requirements and design makes with Owner for all wet laboratories, per the cable schedule, Appendix A. Submit sample of stainless steel plates and modular jacks to confirm acceptable compatibility and special labeling requirements. J. Others, upon approval by CIT, for other non -typical field conditions encountered. 1. 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. UTP Cable: 1. All exposed wiring shall be installed in surface metal raceway, conduit, and enclosed cable tray, except within TR's. 2. All wiring above ceilings shall be installed in closed cable tray, conduit, and raceway as called for. 3. Shall not be run exposed or in open J -Hook or hangers. 4. Shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13 mm). 5. Shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. 6. Cornell Standards recommends, but does not require, service loops in the TR Rooms. However, when creating service loops, they should be coiled in a Figure - Eight configuration to minimize the affect of return loss and near end cross -talk. Review with Owner prior to cable rough -in and mock-up as directed for approval to proceed. 7. Shall be installed such that cables can maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated in such a way that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts 8. Shall be installed in one continuous length unless specified in the contract document. 9. The overall diameter of the Category 6 cable is expected to be less than 0.250 inches. If the approved submittal indicates a cable outside diameter greater than 0.250, the Division 27 contractor is solely responsible to coordinate with the Division 26 contractor the requirement to adjust all pathway designs, sizing accordingly and recalculate and abide by the design criteria for maximum fill ratios for all horizontal pathway runs of conduit, cable tray and raceway. The contractor shall bear all costs to affect this change and provide as- builts reflecting all pathway sizing changes. Also refer to Section 260500 and the Raceway Section 260533 of Division 26 specifications for additional requirements. 10. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 11. Maximum length shall be 90 meters, TR teimination to WAO termination. 12. Cable shall have no physical defects such as cuts, tears or bulges in the outer jacket. Cables with defects shall be replaced. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 9 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 13. Install cable in neat and workmanlike manner. Neatly bundle, support and tie all cable in closets, in both the vertical and horizontal plane. Leave sufficient cable for 90o sweeps at all vertical drops. 14. Provide reusable Velcro -type hook and loop straps in each rear vertical channel. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every 4 rack units 15. Provide reusable Velcro -type hook and loop straps in each horizontal of overhead ladder rack/cable runway. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every 3' in straight runs and at least every 12" in radius turns and waterfalls. 16. Provide reusable Velcro -type hook and loop straps in each vertical run of ladder rack/cable runway. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every 12". 17. Maintain the following clearances from EMI sources. 18. Power cable - 6 in. a. Fluorescent Lights - 12 in. b. Transformers - 36 in. c. Adhere to TIA standard requirements regarding pulling tension and allowable lubricants. 19. Do not install Category 6 cable with more than 110N (25 lbs) pull force, as specified in EIA/TIA and BICSI TDDM practices. Utilize appropriate cable lubricant in sufficient quantity to reduce pulling friction to acceptable levels on: long pulls inside conduit, pulls of multiple cables into a single small bore conduit, on conduit runs greater than 100 lineal feet with bends of opposing directions, and in conduit runs that exceed 180 degrees of accumulated bends. Use of tensile rated cords (i.e. fishing line) should be used for difficult or questionable pulls - to judge "to go/no-go" condition of the conduit and pulling setup. 20. Care must be taken so that the cable does not bend at any location to a radius less than ten times the diameter of the cable. A cable feeder guide or rollers of suitable dimensions should be used between the cable reel and the face of the duct to protect the cable and guide it into the duct as it is payed off the reel. 21. As the cable is payed off the reel, it should be carefully watched and inspected for sheath defects. If defects are noticed, the pulling operation should be stopped immediately and the Engineer promptly notified of the defect. Kinks and/or other irregularities in the cable sheath should be removed or corrected as directed by the engineer. 22. Cable jackets that are chaffed or burned exposing internal conductor insulation or have bare conductors shall be replaced, not spliced 23. Test, label, and document as called for. 24. Firestop the interior of fire rated assembly openings where sleeves, conduits, raceways, cable trays or cables are installed through a fire barrier. B. UTP MODULAR JACKS 1. All cables shall be terminated with modular jacks that snap into a faceplate mounted on a wall outlet box, surface raceways or power pole. Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 10 February 29, 2016 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, New York SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 2. Outlet boxes shall be secured to building with mechanical fasteners. Adhesive fasteners are not allowed. 3. Jacks shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as close as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisted in a pair as a result of termination to the jack shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13mrn). 4. Jacks shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions and properly mounted in plates, frames, housings or other appropriate mounting device. 5. Jacks shall be installed such that cables terminated to the jacks maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter into the IDC contacts. Cables shall be terminated on jacks such that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts. 6. All extra openings to be filled with blank inserts. 7. Terminate cable per EIA/TIA T -568A standard pin assignments and confirm with Owner in advance of ordering materials. 3.02 FIRESTOPPING A. Firestop all sleeves and conduit openings after the cable installations are complete. B. Never leave breaches in two and three hour rated assemblies open for more than a 24- hour period. END OF SECTION 271500 Olin Hall - Suite 270 Renovation 271500 - 11 February 29, 2016